UltraVu 3360

D igital P rinting S ystem

Operation and Maintenance Manual

August 2001
 UltraVu 3360 Digital Printing System D9015-A Rev C
Operation and Maintenance Manual August 2001

(c) 2001 VUTEk, Inc.

All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, adapted,
or transmitted in any form or by any means without express written permission
from VUTEk, Inc.
VUTEk, Inc.
VUTEk, Inc. makes no representations or warranties with respect to the contents
Corporate Offices of this manual. Further, VUTEk reserves the right to revise or change this publica-
tion without obligation to notify any person of such changes.
189 Waukewan Street
Meredith, New Hampshire 03253 VUTEk and UltraVu are trademarks of VUTEk, Inc. Windows 95/98/NT are regis-
Voice (603) 279-4635 tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Adobe, Acrobat, Illustrator, Photo-
Fax (603) 279-6191 Shop, PageMaker, PostScript are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated. Pantone is a registered trademark of Pantone, Inc. Apple Color
Sync System, AppleTalk, and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Com-
puter, Inc. Kodak is a registered trademark of Kodak Corporation. IBM is a regis-
tered Trademark of International Business Machines, Inc. JAZ is a registered
trademark of Iomega Corporation. ColorBurst is a trademark of Compatible Sys-
tems Engineering, Inc. Sony is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation.
QuarkXPress is a registered trademark of Quark, Inc. Intel and Pentium are regis-
tered trademarks of Intel Corporation.
 Table of Contents
••••••

Preface xxvii

A bout This M anual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii

W ho S hould U se This M anual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviii

Printer O perations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviii

Technical S upport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviii

C onventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxix

For M ore Inform ation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxix

S afety C oncerns for the O perator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxix

A bout This S ection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxix

S afety Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxx

G eneral Safety Inform ation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxi

Fire P revention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxiii

E yew ash S tations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxiv

V entilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxiv

W aste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxiv

R egulatory C om pliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxiv

Chapter 1 Introduction 1-1

W elcom e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

D escription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

P urpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

P rinter C om ponent Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

C ontrols and Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Table of C ontents iii

 P rinter Function B uttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Online Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Test Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Advance Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

F Pinch Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

B Pinch Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Tension Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Color 1 Button (Cyan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Color 2 Button (Magenta) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Color 3 Button (Yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Color 4 Button (Black) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Color 5 Button (Light Cyan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Color 6 Button (Light Magenta) . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Color 7 Button (Light Yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Color 8 Button (Light Black). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Error Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Power Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Printer Function Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Auto Purge Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Empty Pack Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Solvent Purge Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Ink Purge Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Fire Jets Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Ready Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Capper Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Cap Heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Test 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Test 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

iv Table of C ontents
 Test 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Test 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Test 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Test 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

P laten P reheater and M edia D ryer C ontrols . . . . . . . 1-13

W orkstation Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

U ltraV u C ontrol U nit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

P rinter C ontrol U nit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

O perator R equirem ents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

The M ain O perator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

M ain O perator S kill R equirem ents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

O ther O perators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Chapter 2 Overview 2-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Jet P ack A ssem bly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

D rop on D em and Inkjets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Jet P ack D escription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

C arriage C om ponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Jet P ack B oards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

C ooling Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

E dge D etector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

S olenoid Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Ink and S olvent S ystem s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Ink and S olvent C ontrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

S olenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

A ir and S olvent Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

P rinter S elector S w itch Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Table of C ontents v
 P rim ary Ink Tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Ink P um ps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

S olvent Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

A ir P ressure R egulators A nd S olenoids . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

V enturi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

C apper P late . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

M otors, Servos and Encoders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

M otors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

S ervo C ontrollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

M otor E ncoders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Y Servo Rotary Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

X Servo Optical Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

P laten P reheater and M edia D ryer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

P inch R oller S ystem (A ir S ection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

E lectrical Pow er. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Chapter 3 Operation 3-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

S tarting and S hutting D ow n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

S tarting the P rinter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

S hutting O ff the P rinter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

R ecovering from an E m ergency S top . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

W orking w ith Ink, M edia and P rinter S etup . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

C hanging the 8-C olor / 4-C olor M odes . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Loading M aterial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

W orking w ith M ultiple R olls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

P reparing the Jet P acks for P rinting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Jet Preparation Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

vi Table of C ontents
 Jet Covering Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

R ecovering from P lugged Jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

U sing the Jet P ack C leaning S ystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Installing the C leaning S ystem Station . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Jet P ack C leaning P rocedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

R eturning Jet P acks to VU TEk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

M aintaining the C leaning S tation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

U sing the M edia H old D ow n P late . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Working with the Vacuum Platen for

Gripping Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Working with the Mesh Cavity for Mesh

Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Understanding the Printer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

U sing the Internal Test Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Test 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Test 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Test 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Test 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Test 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Test 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

O perating the H eater C ontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

O perating the M edia C ooling Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

U nderstanding P rint S peeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Q uality Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Standard S peed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Maximum Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

U nderstanding P rint M odes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Draft Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Enhanced Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Table of C ontents vii

 Ultra Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Im proving P rint Q uality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

S etting the P rint G ap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

A djusting the S tep S izes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

W orking w ith the P reheater Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

W orking w ith the M edia D ryer S ettings . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

A djusting the M edia Tension S ettings . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

M anaging Jet O utage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

C onducting Trial R uns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

W orking w ith R IP File R esolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

S etting the C arriage H eight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

A djusting the E ncoder W heel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

C om pensating for H orizontal B anding . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Chapter 4 UltraVu Software 4-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

U nderstanding U ltraV u C ontrol P rogram . . . . . . . . . 4-1

S tarting the U ltraV u C ontrol P rogram . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

U nderstanding the U ltraV u M enu Structure . . . . . . . 4-2

UltraVu Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Button Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Print Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Channels Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

viii Table of C ontents

Chapter 5 RIP Station 5-1

O verview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

P ostscript Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

U nderstanding the P ostscript File Form at . . . . . . . . . 5-1

D ot G ain and R IP C olor C orrection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

U nderstanding D ot G ain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Ink C haracteristics That A ffect D ot G ain . . . . . 5-4

M edia C haracteristics That A ffect D ot G ain . . . 5-5

P rinter C haracteristics and S ettings That

A ffect D ot G ain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

G C R , U C R , M axim um B lack, and N eutral . . . . . . . 5-6

W orking w ith C olorB urst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

O pen File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Layout A rea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

O ptions M enu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

C olorBurst R IP P rinter S etup (E N V s) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

C reating a Linear S etup File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

R estoring the U ltraV u 3360 Environm ent . . . . . . . . 5-11

D isabling IC C P rofile C olor m angem ent . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Setting M axim um Ink D ensities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

D isabling C olor B alance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Saving the P rinter S etup S ettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

C alibrating C olorB urst C olors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Setting D -M ax for P rim ary C M Y K Inks . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Adjusting the M id-tone D ensity G radation . . . . . . . 5-17

A djusting N eutral Balance (4-C olor G rays) . . . . . . . 5-18

A djusting D -M ax and C olor B alance

(R G B S econdary C olors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Table of C ontents ix
 C olorB urst W orkflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Chapter 6 Networking 6-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

N etw ork C onfigurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Stand Alone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Peer-to-Peer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Server-Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

C onfiguring the R IP W orkstation

Installing the N IC C ard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

C onfiguring the W orkstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

Configuring and Booting from an

IDE CD-ROM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

Configuring and Booting from a

SCSI CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

Repairing the NT Operating System . . . . . . . . 6-16

Chapter 7 Maintenance 7-1

M aintaining the P rinter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

S chedule D etails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

After Printing Each Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Every Eight (8) Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Daily. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Weekly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Monthly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Quarterly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Bi-annually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Annually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

x Table of C ontents
 M aintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

C leaning the U ltraV u 3360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Jet P ack C overing P rocedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

C aring for the Jet P ack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

R em oving the Jet P acks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Installing the Jet P acks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

C hanging O ver Ink C olors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Lubricating the C arriage R ails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

R eplacing the C arriage Air and S olvent Filters . . . . . 7-9

C leaning the P rim ary Ink Tank Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

C leaning the Ink Level S ensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

C leaning the S econdary Ink Tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

A djusting the E dge D etector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

A djusting the O ptical E ncoder H ead G ap . . . . . . . . . 7-14

M aintenance C hart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

Chapter 8 Installation 8-1

P urpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

S ite P reparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

S pace R equirem ents and D im ensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

E nvironm ent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

P ow er R equirem ents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

A ir R equirem ents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

P repress R equirem ents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

U ltraV u W orkstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

C olorB urst W orkstation (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Im age Preparation S oftw are . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Installation P rocedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Table of C ontents xi
 Leveling the P rinter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Chapter 9 Troubleshooting 9-1

O verview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Troubleshooting C hecklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

E ntering the P rinter Firm w are . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

P rinter S tatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

E rror S tatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

P rint O ptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

P rinter S etup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

O verrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

D iagnostic A ids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

S ystem Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

D rive Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

P rinter C ontroller M essage Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

U ltraV u 3360 E lectrical C abinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

P rinter C ontroller System O verview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

P ow er S ystem O verview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

U ltraV u W orkstation O verview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

U ltraV u C ontrol U nit and P rinter C ontrol U nit

B IO S V alues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

B IO S B eep C odes and M essages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

P rinter C ontroller C PU M odule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

S uper P 6SB U M otherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

P rinter C ontroller Board: AA 90206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

A G P V ideo B oard: P 9110-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

U ltraV u W orkstation C P U M odule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36

S uper P 6SB U M otherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37

P C I Interface B oard: A A 70175 / A A70203 . . . . . . . . 9-38

xii Table of C ontents

 P ow er B oard: A A90198 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39

N etw ork Interface C ard: P 7398-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40

C arriage Interface B oard A A90203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41

C arriage B ackplane B oard: A A 90207 . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42

S C SI A dapter B oard: P 1530-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43

H V Am plifier B oard: A A 90205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44

P ixel B oard: A A 90013 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45

Ink D raw Transfer B oard: A A 90199 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46

C ontrol P anel B oard: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

C orrective P rocedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48

R ew riting P aram eters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48

W riting Param eters to the X S ervo C ontroller . . . 9-48

W riting Param eters to the R ear Y

Servo C ontroller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54

W riting Param eters to the Front Y

Servo C ontroller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55

Chapter 10 Specifications 10-1

U ltraV u 3360 S C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Printing Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Media Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Productivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

UltraVu 3360 RIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Control Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Inks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Table of C ontents xiii

 Appendix A Upgrading Software A-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A -1

R ecovering from Flash D rive Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A -1

C reating U ltraVu Firm w are and S oftw are D isks . . . . . . A -2

U sing the C D O ption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A -2

R equired D isks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A -2

M aking U ltraVu Firm w are D isks - C D O ption . A -2

M aking U ltraVu S oftw are D isks - C D O ption . A -3

M aking U ltraVu Firm w are D isks -

V uteksupport.com O ption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A -3

M aking U ltraVu S oftw are D isks -

V uteksupport.com O ption . . . . . . . . . . . . . A -4

Installing U ltraV u Softw are and Firm w are . . . . . . . . . . A -5

Installing U ltraV u Firm w are . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A -5

V erifying BIO S Settings for Flash D rive . . . . . A -5

Installing U ltraV u Firm w are to Flash D rive . . . A -6

Installing U ltraV u Softw are . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A -7

Appendix B Ventilation Hood Design B-1

Appendix C Removable Disks C-1

Form atting Rem ovable JAZ Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-1

Appendix D Material Safety Data Sheets D-1

xiv Table of C ontents

Appendix E UltraVu 3360 Accessories E-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E -1

U nw inder A ccessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E -1

U nw inder C ontrol P anel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E -2

W orking w ith the A ir C ore S haft on the U nw inder . E -4

W inder A ccessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E -6

W inder C ontrol P anel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E -6

W orking w ith the A ir C ore S haft on the W inder . . . E -9

Glossary G-1

Index I-1

Table of C ontents xv
xvi Table of C ontents
 List of Figures
••••••

Chapter 1 Introduction

Figure 1-1 3360 Digital Printing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Figure 1-2 Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Figure 1-3 Function Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Figure 1-4 Function Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Figure 1-5 Preheater and Dryer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Figure 1-6 UltraVu Control Mode on the UltraVu

Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Figure 1-7 Printer Control Mode on the UltraVu

Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Chapter 2 Overview

Figure 2-1 Carriage Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Figure 2-2 Edge Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Figure 2-3 Ink and Solvent Carriage Components . . . . . . . . 2-5

Figure 2-4 Carriage Showing Solenoids

(Rear Plate View From Top). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Figure 2-5 Ink and Solvent Control Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Figure 2-6 Ink Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Figure 2-7 Ink Tray - Close -up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Figure 2-8 Air Pressure Regulators and Solenoids . . . . . . . . 2-10

Figure 2-9 Capper Override Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Figure 2-10 Venturi and Overflow Tank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Figure 2-11 Capper Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

List of Figures xvii

 Figure 2-12 X Servo Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Figure 2-13 F Pinch Roller Drive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Figure 2-14 Servo Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Figure 2-15 Optical Encoder and Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Figure 2-16 Platen Preheater and Media Dryer. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Figure 2-17 Dryer and Cooling Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Figure 2-18 Regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Figure 2-19 Main Disconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Figure 2-20 Power Access Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Figure 2-21 Line Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Figure 2-22 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Chapter 3 Operation

Figure 3-1 Eight Color / Four Color Mode Window . . . . . . . . 3-3

Figure 3-2 Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Figure 3-3 Source Roll Removed from Rear of Printer . . . . . 3-5

Figure 3-4 Putting the Media Roll onto the Source Shaft . . . 3-5

Figure 3-5 Locking the Roll Chuck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Figure 3-6 Media Feed Path (side view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Figure 3-7 Printer Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Figure 3-8 Jet Pack Cleaning Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Figure 3-9 Vacuum Platen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Figure 3-10 Set Printer Parameters Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Figure 3-11 Platen with Mesh Cavity Exposed . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Figure 3-12 Removing the Vacuum Platen Cover Vacuum

End Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Figure 3-13 Installing the Vacuum Platen Cover . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Figure 3-14 Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Figure 3-15 Heater Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

xviii List of Figures

 Figure 3-16 Fan Switch Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Figure 3-17 Tension Air Regulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Figure 3-18 Carriage (rear view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Figure 3-19 Carriage Height Adjustment (right side) . . . . . . . . 3-31

Figure 3-20 Carriage (front view). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Figure 3-21 Adjusting the Encoder Wheel (rear view) . . . . . . 3-33

Chapter 4 UltraVu Software

Figure 4-1 UltraVu Printer Control Program Menu . . . . . . . . 4-2

Figure 4-2 UltraVu Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Figure 4-3 File Menu with File Open Window . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Figure 4-4 Print Pull-Down Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Figure 4-5 File Information Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Figure 4-6 Print Mode Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Figure 4-7 Media Layout Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Figure 4-8 Units Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Figure 4-9 Image Space Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Figure 4-10 Duplications Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Figure 4-11 Output Resolutions Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Figure 4-12 Select Printing Areas Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Figure 4-13 Print Parameters Selected Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Figure 4-14 View Pull Down Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Figure 4-15 Setup Pull-Down Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Figure 4-16 Set Printer Parameters Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Figure 4-17 Update Firmware Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Figure 4-18 Job Data Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Figure 4-19 Password Entry Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Figure 4-20 Channels Pull-Down Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

List of Figures xix

 Figure 4-21 Eight Color / Four Color Mode Window . . . . . . . . 4-19

Figure 4-22 Help Pull-Down Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Figure 4-23 About UltraVu by VUTEk Window . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Figure 4-24 Printer Firmware Revision Level Screen . . . . . . . 4-21

Figure 4-25 Material Usage Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Chapter 5 RIP Station

Figure 5-1 Dot gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Figure 5-2 Dot Gain on Different Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Figure 5-3 Gray Component Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Figure 5-4 Under Color Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Figure 5-5 Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Figure 5-6 Printer Options with Printer Setup Window . . . . . 5-8

Figure 5-7 PostScript Layout Output File Option Window . . . 5-9

Figure 5-8 PostScript Interpreter Options Window . . . . . . . . 5-10

Figure 5-9 Advanced PostScript Options Window. . . . . . . . . 5-10

Figure 5-10 Options Menu Showing Restore Printer Setup. . . 5-11

Figure 5-11 ICC Profile Options Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Figure 5-12 Color Adjustments Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Figure 5-13 Ink Balance and RGB to CMYK Window . . . . . . . 5-13

Figure 5-14 Vutek Supplied Image - CalTarg.eps . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Figure 5-15 Color Adjustments Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Figure 5-16 Color Curve Information Window . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Figure 5-17 Ink Balance and RGB to CMYK Window . . . . . . . 5-19

Figure 5-18 Ink Balance and RGB to CMYK Window . . . . . . . 5-20

Figure 5-19 ColorBurst Workflow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

xx List of Figures
Chapter 6 Networking

Figure 6-1 Stand Alone Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Figure 6-2 Peer-to-Peer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Figure 6-3 Server-Router Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Figure 6-4 3Com NIC Diagnostics (General) Window . . . . . . 6-5

Figure 6-5 3Com NIC Diagnostics (Diagnostics) Window . . . 6-5

Figure 6-6 My Computer Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Figure 6-7 (C:) Properties (Sharing) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Figure 6-8 Access Through Share Permissions Window . . . 6-7

Figure 6-9 Network (Protocols) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Figure 6-10 Network (Adapters) Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Figure 6-11 Network (Services) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Figure 6-12 Services Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Figure 6-13 Services Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Figure 6-14 Network (Services) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Figure 6-15 Selecting Network Services Window . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

Chapter 7 Maintenance

Figure 7-1 Printer Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Figure 7-2 Printer Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Figure 7-3 Lubricating the Carriage Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Figure 7-4 In-line Ink Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Figure 7-5 Primary Ink Tank Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Figure 7-6 Edge Detector Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

Figure 7-7 Printer Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

Figure 7-8 Printer Options Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

Figure 7-9 System Tests Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

Figure 7-10 Optical Encoder Head and Strip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

List of Figures xxi

 Chapter 8 Installation

Figure 8-1 UltraVu 3360 Digital Printing System . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Figure 8-3 Basic Water and Oil Filtration System . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Figure 8-4 Bubble Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Chapter 9 Troubleshooting

Figure 9-1 Printer-Workstation Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Figure 9-2 Printer Firmware - Printer Status Window . . . . . . 9-3

Figure 9-3 Printer Firmware - Error Status Window . . . . . . . 9-4

Figure 9-4 Printer Firmware - Printer Options Window . . . . . 9-5

Figure 9-5 Printer Firmware - Printer Setup Window . . . . . . 9-6

Figure 9-6 Printer Firmware - Overrides Window . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Figure 9-7 Printer Firmware - Diagnostic Aids Window . . . . 9-8

Figure 9-8 Printer Firmware - System Tests Window . . . . . . 9-9

Figure 9-9 Printer Firmware - Drive Tuning Window . . . . . . . 9-10

Figure 9-10 Electrical Cabinet (top view). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Figure 9-11 Electrical Cabinet (front view). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Figure 9-12 Electrical Cabinet Showing Power System

Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Figure 9-13 Controller Board Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Figure 9-14 Power System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Figure 9-15 Super P6SBU Motherboard Photo . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

Figure 9-16 Super P6SBU Motherboard Layout . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32

Figure 9-17 Printer Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

Figure 9-18 ATI Rage II Graphics Accelerator . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

Figure 9-19 Super P6SBU Motherboard Photo . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36

Figure 9-20 Super P6SBU Motherboard Layout . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37

xxii List of Figures

 Figure 9-21 PCI Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38

Figure 9-22 Power Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39

Figure 9-23 Network Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40

Figure 9-24 Carriage Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41

Figure 9-25 Carriage Backplane Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42

Figure 9-26 Adaptec PCI-to-Ultra SCSI Host Adapter . . . . . . 9-43

Figure 9-27 HV Amplifier Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44

Figure 9-28 Pixel Board Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45

Figure 9-29 Ink Transfer Board Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46

Figure 9-30 Control Panel Board Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

Figure 9-31 Power Board Showing Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48

Figure 9-32 Changing Cables to Electronics Box (top) . . . . . . 9-49

Figure 9-33 Selecting BRU Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50

Figure 9-34 BRU Master Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50

Figure 9-35 Drive Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51

Figure 9-36 Drive Setup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51

Figure 9-37 File Open Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52

Figure 9-38 Drive Select Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52

Figure 9-39 Writing Drive Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53

Figure 9-40 Power Board Showing Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53

Figure 9-41 Changing Cables To Electronics Box (top) . . . . . 9-54

Figure 9-42 Servo Controllers Showing J5 Connector . . . . . . 9-55

Appendix A Upgrading Software

Figure A-1 Printer Firmware - Printer Setup Window. . . . . . . A-7

Appendix B Ventilation Hood Design

Figure B-1 Ventilation Hood Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

List of Figures xxiii

 Figure B-2 Curtain Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7

Appendix E UltraVu 3360 Accessories

Figure E-1 Unwinder Accessory Attached to Rear of Printer . E-1

Figure E-2 Feeding Media from the Unwinder Accessory . . . E-2

Figure E-3 Unwinder Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3

Figure E-4 Air Core Shaft Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4

Figure E-5 Unwinder Accessory Showing Nozzle

and Air Core Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5

Figure E-6 Feeding Media onto the Winder Accessory . . . . . E-6

Figure E-7 Winder Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7

Figure E-8 Air Core Shaft Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8

Figure E-9 Winder Accessory Showing Nozzle

and Air Core Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9

xxiv List of Figures

 List of Tables
••••••

Chapter 1 Introduction

Table 1-1 Printer Componet Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Chapter 7 Maintenance

Table 7-1 UltraVu 3360 Maintenance Schedule. . . . . . . . . . 7-16

Chapter 9 Troubleshooting

Table 9-1 Warning Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Table 9-2 Critcal Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Table 9-3 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Table 9-4 AMIBIOS Setup - Version 2.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Table 9-5 BIOS Error Beep Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Table 9-6 BIOS Error Beep Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

Table 9-7 BIOS Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

List of Tables xxv

xxvi List of Tables
 Preface
••••••

About This M anual

T his m an ual sh ow s yo u h ow to install, op erate, m a intain an d
trou ble sh oo t th e U ltraVu 3 36 0 D igital P rinting S y stem . T h ere are also
chap ters on th e U ltraVu 33 60 S o ftw are an d ne tw o rk in g. T he m an ual is
o rg an iz ed as fo llo w s:
C h ap ter 1 "In trod uction " introd uce s y ou to the U ltraVu 3 36 0 p rin ter
and its fe atu res.
C h ap ter 2 " O verview " d e sc rib es the fun ctio n a l su b sy stem s and
m ajo r com p on ents of th e p rinter.
C h ap ter 3 " O peration " p ro vides p ro ce d u res fo r d a ily o peration o f
th e p rinter.
C h ap ter 4 " U ltraVu W ork station " describ es the u se an d fu nction s
of the U ltraVu 3 360 w orkstation so ftw are.
C h ap ter 5 " R IP Station" helps y ou u nderstan d the C o lorB u rst R IP
softw are an d ho w it fits in th e im age prep aratio n
w o rk flow.
C h ap ter 6 " N etw orkin g" in clu des co nsid era tio ns an d instructio ns
fo r installin g th e U ltraVu 336 0 prin ter in a lo cal-area
netw o rk .
C h ap ter 7 "M ain ten an ce" p ro vides sched ules a nd p ro cedu res for
prin ter m aintenan ce.
C h ap ter 8 "In stallation " c ontain s in fo rm ation y ou w ill nee d b efo re
in stallin g th e U ltraVu 3 36 0 prin ter in a new locatio n.
C h ap ter 9 "Troub lesh ootin g" inclu d e s ta b le s, d iagram s, an d
in struction s for troub lesh oo tin g and rep airin g th e p rinter.
C h ap ter 10 "S p ecification s" inclu des ph ysical and fu nction al
specification s o f th e U ltra Vu 3 36 0 prin ter.
G lossary " G lossary" defin es techn ical term s used in th is m anu al.

Preface xxvii
 P lease take th e tim e to fam iliarize yo urse lf w ith each section . T his w ill
help to red uce do w n tim e an d im prov e print q uality. A s a result you w ill
be m ore efficien t w ith o perating an d m ain tainin g yo ur U ltraVu 3 36 0
D igital P rinting S y stem .

W ho Should Use This Manual

T his m an ual is w ritten fo r p rin ter o p e rators an d tec h n ical sup po rt
person nel. It con tains all the in fo rm ation that ope rators w ill need to
succe ssfully o perate an d m ain tain the U ltraVu 3 360 dig ita l P rin ting
S ystem . In ad ditio n, it inclu des te chn ical sp ecificatio ns and d iag ram s
th at w ill facilita te disc ussio ns w ith te chn ical su ppo rt staff.

Printer O perators
P rinter O p erators m ust b e able to o perate the p rinter an d perform rou tin e
m ain tena nce proced ures. T hey w ill also b e th e co m m unication link w ith
V U T E k custo m er su p p o rt and sh o u ld b e ca p ab le o f telep ho ne-assiste d
prob lem solv in g and b asic repair ta sk s.
If yo u are a p rinter o perato r, read ch apters 1, 2, 4, and 5 fo r b ackg ro un d
o n u sing the U ltraVu 3 3 6 0 D ig ital P rintin g S y stem . T hese ch apters w ill
help yo u b ecom e fam iliar w ith the p rinter co m p on ents an d w orkstatio n
in terfac e.
C h apte r 3 cov ers rou tin e, d aily op eratio n of the prin ter. T his im portan t
chap ter tells y o u h o w to u se the U ltraVu 3 3 6 0 D ig ital P rin tin g S yste m
to g en erate w id e-fo rm at im ag es o n a v ariety o f m ed ia .
C h apte r 7 in clu des im p ortant inform ation ab ou t perio dic m ainten anc e
task s. F ollow the m ain ten ance sch edu les and instru ctions in clu ded in
th is chap ter to en su re that y ou r prin ter con tin ues to o perate p ro perly.
C h apte rs 6 , 8 , 9 , an d 1 0 con tain tech n ic al reso u rces y o u m ay n eed
occa sion ally, esp ecially w hen tryin g to reco ver from printer p ro blem s.
U se th e in fo rm atio n in the se ch apte rs to facilitate yo ur co m m u nication
w ith o ur S u ppo rt E n gineers.

Technical Support
Tech nical S u ppo rt is availab le from yo ur lo cal V U T E k represen tative or
b y c allin g y ou r P ro du ct S u p p o rt re p resentativ e at U S 6 0 3 -2 7 9 -4 6 3 5 .
O u r ex pert Tech nical S up port staff w ill attem pt to diagn ose yo ur
prob lem ov er th e tele pho ne b efo re sch edu lin g a serv ice v isit.

xxviii P reface
 Tech nical S up port p erso nne l w ill use th e in fo rm ation in th is m anu al to
g u ide u sers th ro u g h th e p ro cess o f iden tify in g a n d solving p rinte r
prob lem s. Techn ical d etails cov ered in ch apters 2 , 9, and 10 are
espec ially suited to th is purpo se. D iag ram s, instru ctions, and
m ain tena nce proc edu res in clu ded in other c hap ters m ay b e useful as
w ell.

Conventions
T his m an ual u ses the fo llow ing inform ationa l con ven tio ns :

N o te: A special techn iq ue or inform ation tha t m ay h elp yo u perfo rm a

ta sk o r u nd erstan d a p rocess.

C a u tion : A lerts yo u to so m ethin g th at h as the p otential to cau se

da m a ge to h ardw a re, softw a re, o r d ata.

W A R N IN G : A lerts yo u to som eth in g th a t h a s th e p oten tia l to ca u se

ph ysical h arm to yo u o r o th ers a rou n d you .

For M ore Inform ation

If y o u h av e any q uestio n s ab o u t th is m a n u a l, the U ltraVu 3 3 6 0 D ig ital
P rinting S ystem , o r any oth er V U T E k p ro du cts, p lea se d o no t hesitate to
con tact o ur P rod uct S u pp ort staff at (60 3) 279 -463 5.
P lease take th e tim e to fam iliarize yo urself w ith each section . T his w ill
help to red uce do w n tim e an d im prov e print q uality. A s a result you w ill
be m ore efficien t w ith o perating an d m ain tainin g yo ur U ltraVu 3 36 0
S ystem .

Safety Concerns for the Operator

About This Section

T his sectio n prov ides im p ortan t safety in fo rm ation . R ead th e safety
in fo rm ation c arefully b efo re o perating the prin ter!

Preface xxix
 Safety Labels
A ll Vutek printers h ave safety labels attach ed. S afety lab els in dic ate
specific sa fety haza rd s an d w a ys to av oid accid ents. Igno ring safety in
fo rm atio n m a y lead to seriou s o r fatal injury or con siderab le prop erty
dam ag e.P lease ob se rv e all safety labels.

W ear Eye Protection

G eneral D anger

Protective Earth or Safety G round

Burn H azard H ot Surface

xxx P reface
 H and Entanglem ent C hain D rive

H igh Voltage

General Safety Inform ation

In k an d solv ent c hem ica ls are u se d w ith yo ur U ltra Vu printer. R efer to
th e "M a terial S afety D ata S hee ts" that w ere sh ipp ed w ith you r p rinter
fo r the releva nt safety inform atio n. P lease keep the follow in g in m ind:
• T he solven t and ink s u sed in the V U T E k U ltraVu prin ter vap orize
easily at roo m te m p era ture.
• S olv ent v apo rs are flam m ab le an d exp lo sive.
• S plash in g solv ent in ey es ca n dam ag e the co rn ea of the ey e a nd
im pa ir v isio n.
• N ev er w ear con tact len ses w h ile u sin g th e prin ter or w h en ex po sed to
solven t or ink v apo rs.
• A lw ay s u se p ro tec tiv e g o g g les a n d g lo v es w he n h an dlin g so lv ent,
in k s o r a n y w aste flu id s fro m th e p rinter.
• S olv ent c an be irrita tin g to ey es, throat an d skin, and b rea thing its
v ap ors c an cause d izzin ess o r o th er sym p tom s.
• S olv ent v apo rs are h eav ier than air an d m a y travel an d co llect in lo w
spo ts.
T he V U T E k U ltraVu prin ter is a c om plex m achine w ith m an y m ov ing
parts, su ch as the prin t head s, ro llers and tray s. H a nds, fingers, h air, feet
o r o th er b od y p arts co u ld b e p in ch ed o r cru sh ed b y these m o v in g p arts.
P lease ob serv e the follow in g precau tio ns w h en w orkin g arou nd the
m achine:

Preface xxxi
 • N o sm o kin g, pilot lig hts, op en flam es, sto ves, heaters o r halog en
lights w ithin 25 feet o f any edg e o f th e prin ter.
• N o p ortab le spark -p ro duc ing e quipm en t or sp ark s (sta tic, elec trical
or m ec han ical) w ith in 25 feet of an y ed ge of the p rinter.
• T he Vacu u m E x h a u st S yste m m ust fun ctio n b efo re the p rin ter w ill
op era te. D o no t discon nect this safety feature or flam m ab le and
exp lo sive v apo rs w ill accu m ula te.
• A lw ay s v erify tha t fresh rep la cem ent air is p ro v id ed b y p assiv e o r
m echan ical ven tilatio n b efo re starting the prin ter.
• S to re in k o r solvent in an app ro ved flam m ab le liq u id sto rage c ab in et;
• K ee p ink and so lve nt co nta ine rs tig htly closed at all tim es. If a
con tainer beco m e s d am aged , tran sfer the in k or solv ent to an oth er
clea n, c om patible con tainer w ith a sealed lid .
• C le an any ink o r so lven t spills as soo n as they occu r.
• D ispose of spill-clean in g m ate rials, solv ent-so aked ra gs an d d ry ink
dep osits in a co vered, firep ro of con tainer located at least 2 5 fee t from
any ed ge of the prin ter.F ire and ex plosio n hazard can b e ca used fro m
prin ter w astes.
• C h eck th e w aste cab in et tw ice each shift, and e m p ty the w a ste
con tainer before it ho ld s a g allo n of w aste liq uid .
• D ispose o f w a ste liq uids in a co vered fireproo f con tainer loca ted at
least 2 5 feet fro m an y edg e of the prin ter. T his c ontain er m ust b e
grou nd ed du ring tran sfer of liq uid s.
• W aste solven t and ink a re ha zard ou s w astes, w h ich sho uld be
in cin erated. T hese w a stes sh ou ld n ot b e disch arged in a sew er, and
are b ann ed fro m land fill dispo sa l.
• A lw ay s w ear p ro tec tiv e gog gles w hen clean in g prin t head s, flu shin g
in k circuits or tra nsfe rrin g in k, so lv ent o r w a ste fluid .
• N ev er w ear co ntact len ses w hile ha ndlin g in ks or so lv ent.
• A lw ay s w ear protective glo ves w h ile han dling ink, solv ent o r w aste
fluid.
• D o n ot c onn ect the prin ter to th e m ain po w er sou rce u nless an
em ergen cy shu td ow n sw itch, w h ich ca n disc onn ect all po w er to th e
syste m , is present.
• D o no t rem ov e the breaker p anel co ver for m ain po w er to the printer.
• D o n ot service electrical co m pon ents w hile th e p rinter is in stand by
or printin g m odes.
• D o n ot d rink o r o therw ise ing est solven t, ink o r w aste fluids.
• D o n ot a llo w u n train ed p erso n n el to h a n d le ink s a n d solven ts o r
op era te th e p rinter.

xxxii P reface
• P rinter an d o th e r eq u ip m ent m ust b e g ro u n d ed a ccordin g to the local
elec trical safety c ode s.
• T he p rin ter m u st b e installed o n cle an tiled o r con crete flo o rs, anti-
static carpeting o r an ti-static tiles to red uce haz ard ou s acc um ulatio ns
of static electricity.
• G rou nd the co vered, firep ro of contain ers for d isp osal o f w astes.
• N ev er u se w ate r to ex tin g u ish fires o n o r n e ar th e p rinter. U se o n ly
dry po w d er, foam or C 02 typ e fire extin guishers.
• K ee p han ds clear of p ape r cylin ders w hile prin ter is o perating .
• N ev er o perate p rinter un der the influen ce of drugs o r alco ho l.
• D o n ot clim b o nto print table n or rollers for an y reaso n; pinch in g o r
cru sh in g inju ry is p o ssib le .
• U se a fo rk lift or other m ech anical m ean s sufficient to lo ad o r unload
m edia ro lls o nto prin ter. C h eck the w eig ht o f roll an d liftin g cap acity
of fo rk lift be fo re lo ading o r un lo ading roll on p rinte r.
• W ear steel-to ed safe ty b o o ts d urin g lo adin g an d u n loa d in g o f
m aterials.
• To av oid back stra in o r other injuries, tw o persons sho uld lift an d
lo w er lon ger m e dia rolls from bo th en ds.
• W h ile p rinter is in actio n m ake su re all cov ers are c losed .
• D o no t touc h an y h eating elem en t or d ry ing system com po nen t w hen
th e p rinter is on ; seriou s b urns can result.

Fire Prevention
T he in k an d solv ent sh o u ld b e c learly lab eled an d k ep t in sto rage
cabinets d esig ned to ho ld flam m able liq uids, a nd m ust b e clearly
lab eled . T he sto rage cabinet an d w a rn ing labels m u st c om ply w ith lo cal
fire an d o cc u p a tio n al safety stand ards.
N o m ore th an 2 00 liters o f ink and solv ent sho uld be stored in an y single
sto rag e c abinet. L oca l fire ordinan ce reg ardin g th e use and storage o f
flam m able m aterials m ust be stric tly o bserved !
F ire ex ting uish ers co ntaining C O 2 sho uld be easily accessible an d
visible fo r all a pproa ches to the m achine. T he ex tin gu ishers shou ld b e
re achab le w ith in 2 5 fee t (7 .6 m ) of th e p rinter an d th e flam m ab le liquids
sto rag e c abinets, or according to lo cal fire o rd in ance.

Preface xxxiii
 Eyewash Stations
E yew ash statio ns com plying w ith loca l safety stan dards sho uld be
in stalled w ith in 2 5 fee t (7 .6 m ) of the prin ter and the flam m able liq uid
sto rag e cab ine ts. T he loca tio n o f the se station s sho uld b e clea rly m arked
and easily accessib le so th at th ey can b e reac hed q uic kly if n eeded .
S afety sign s m u st be po sted in the prin ter w ork area to ale rt p erso nne l to
p o ten tial d an gers. T he se sig n s sho uld com p ly w ith local o ccu p atio n al
safe ty ord inan ce.

Ventilation
To p rev ent a ccum u lation o f ha zard ou s v apo rs, sufficien t ve ntilation
m ust be p ro vided to exch ang e air in th e w o rk area ne ar th e printer
app ro xim a tely six to e ig h t (6-8) tim es an h o u r. T he v en tilatio n o u tlets
sho uld be lo w eno ug h so th at fu m es d o no t accu m ulate near the flo or.

Electrical
A n y elec trical eq uipm ent installe d in the vicin ity o f the prin ter m u st
m eet th e req uirem en ts stip ula ted b y th e local electrical cod e, C lass 1,
D ivision 1 loca tio ns.

Waste
A co vered fire-p ro of c ontain er clearly lab eled as h azardo us w aste
sho uld be available for disp osal of w a ste solven t. T his con tain er m u st b e
elec trically g ro u n d ed d u rin g tran sfe r o f liq u id s into o r fro m th e
con tainer. If solven t-so ake d rag s o r ab sorben ts are u sed to clean the
area, they m ust a lso be d ispo sed of in a clo sed fire p ro of con tain er an d
lab eled a s h azardou s w aste .
W aste co ntainers m u st be lo cated at lea st 25 feet (7.6m ) from the
prin ter. C o nta ct lo cal fire safety, o ccup atio nal sa fety and h azardo us
w aste disp osal regu latory agen cie s for inform ation ab ou t specific
sto rag e an d d ispo sal req uirem en ts for w astes asso ciated w ith the printer.

Regulatory Com pliance

V U T E k's U ltraVu 23 60 an d 33 60 p rinters are E T L listed . A ll m o dels
in these fam ilies o f p rin ters con fo rm to U L stand ard 3111-1 an d are
certified to C A N /C S A stan dard C 2 2.2 N o. 1 01 0.1.

xxxiv P reface
 Chapter 1
Introduction
••••••

Welcom e
C o ngratu latio ns! You hav e pu rch ased the fin est su per-w id e fo rm at, ink
jet prin tin g sy stem in th e w o rld! W e at V U T E k tak e prid e in ou r p rinters.
W e strive to ensu re th at yo u are sa tisfied w ith th e q uality and
in nov ativen ess o f the U ltraVu 33 60 D igital P rintin g S ystem s. Our
highly skilled employees, time proven manufacturing methods, and
our promise to build quality into every one of our products ensures
you have received the very best.

Description
A p rem iu m o utp u t p rinter, th e V U T E k U ltraVu 3 3 6 0 d e liv ers v iv id
fo ur-, six -, or eigh t- co lo r prin ting; idea l fo r clo sely -v iew ed
app lications, in clud in g: p osters, flee t graph ics, tra nsit b us w raps an d
shelters, trad e sh ow g ra phics, b ann ers, po int-o f-pu rch ase and a irport
adv ertising an d teleph on e k io sk s.
T he U ltraVu 3 3 6 0 p rintin g sy stem is a p ie zo electric, d ro p o n d em an d
in k jet p rinting sy stem th at w ill acco m m o date flexible v iny l and pap er
m ed ias u p to 8 0" b y 1 20 0" (2 m b y 3 0 m ) p rin tin g are a. T he m e d ia is fed
to the p rin ter fro m a sin g le roll an d o utp u t throu gh a p in ch ro lle r fo r fan -
fo ld o utput.
T he U ltraVu 33 60 , p ro duces C M Y K 4-, 6-, o r 8 -ch ann el ou tp ut, and
com es in three versio ns:
(1 ) C M Y K - L ig ht C M Y K
(2 ) C M Y K - C M Y K
(3 ) C M Y K - L ig ht C M
E ach v ersio n p rints w ith a tru e a d d ressab le reso lu tio n o f 3 6 0 d p i.
Version 1 p rints in eig ht co lo rs at 1x speed ; Version 2 p rints in fo ur
colors at 2x spe ed; an d Version 3 prints in six co lo rs at 1 x speed .
T he U ltraVu 3 3 6 0 is cap able o f p rintin g m o re th an 2 2 su p e r city k io sk s
(7 8 " b y 3 3 ") p er h o u r in en h an ced q u ality m o d e, w ith ab so lu te co lo r
pan el m atch in g prin t to p rint. T he U ltraVu 33 60 is a h igh qua lity, h ig h

Introduction 1-1
 vo lum e alte rn ativ e to E -stat prin tin g an d an ideal com p lem ent to screen-
p rin tin g . In its h ig h spe ed m od e (sin g le p ass), the U ltraVu 3 36 0 can
attain a p rint rate of 13 30 ft 2 /h r (12 4 m 2 /hr).
T he R a ster Im age P ro cessin g (R IP ) tech nolog y offere d w ith the U ltraVu
33 60 S eries has an easy to use g rap hical user interface , sup po rts
m ultip le lan gu ages, provides m ore accurate co lo r reprod uction a nd
sup ports P ostS crip t L evel 3 and a h ost of other d esktop form ats.
IC C C olor c apab le fo r p aper, v in yl an d pressure se nsitive m ate rials, the
U ltraVu 33 60 S eries uses V U T E k ’s new U ltraVu 3 h ig h du rab ility ink s.
T he U ltraVu in k s h av e b een e v alu ate d and ap p ro v ed o n o v e r 2 0 0
different m ed ias, allo w ing u sers a w ide assortm en t of m ed ia ch oice s.

Purpose
T he U ltra Vu 3 3 6 0 D ig ital P rintin g S ystem is d esig ned to p ro d u ce w id e-
fo rm at, co m puter-ge nerated g raphics on rolled m ed ia. T h is cha pter
in trodu ces yo u to the m ain features an d op tions o f th e p rinter. It also
sho w s yo u th e locatio n of m ajor c om po nen ts of the system an d
describ es the co ntro ls and indicato rs along w ith w o rk station interface
need ed to op erate the U ltraVu 3 360 . T h e chap ter c loses w ith a list of
op era tor req uirem en ts.

1-2 C hapter 1
Features
T he follow in g are all op tio ns in clu ded in bo th the C o lorB u rst R IP
S tation an d U ltraVu P rinte r W orkstatio n:
• M icro soft N T O p era tin g S ystem
• N etw o rk read y - 1 00B aseT E therne t C ard
• P entium III M oth erboa rd (55 0 M H z. o r greater C P U )
• 25 6 M B R A M
• O n e 18G B (or larger) H ard D rive (S C S I)
• IO m ega 2 G B JA Z D riv e
• 17 ” S V G A (12 80 x 102 0) M on itor
• C D -RW R O M D rive
• U ltraVu softw a re (P rin ter In terface S oftw are)
• C o lorB u rst R IP so ftw are and W orkstatio n
• D o ng le S ecurity (R IP S tation)

A d ditio nal features o f th e U ltraVu 336 0 D igital P rintin g S y stem

in clu de:
• 36 0 dp i add ressab le prin t cap ability
• O u tp u t spe ed s as h ig h as 1 2 4 m 2 /hr (13 30 ft 2 /hr)
• In du strial q uality P iezo-electric print head s
• S olv ent-b ased U ltraVu 3 Ink s
• T hree p rin t m o d es: E n h an ced M o d e - U ltra M o d e - D raft M od e
• T hree prin t speed s: Q u ality, S tand ard a nd M a xim u m
• Av ailable in 4-, 6 - an d 8-chan nel m o dels

Introduction 1-3
Printer Com ponent Location
In o rd er to beco m e acq uainte d w ith y ou r U ltraVu 33 60 D igital P rinting
S ystem w e en cou rag e yo u to read the fo llow ing descriptio n of the
prin ter ’s co m pon ents. F ig ure 1-1 show s the location of its m a in
com p o n e n ts.

P rint H ead C a rriage

R ail E le ctrica l C o m p artm e n t
D rye r

F an S w itch

E -S top
IR D ryer
C ontrol P a nel
P laten
U ltraVu W o rksta tion

E -S top
M ain C ircuit B re aker

M a terial F eed E ncoder P rint H ead C arriage

B a ck P inch R ollers
S ource R oll

M ateria l D etector In k C o m partm ent

Figure 1-1 3360 Digital Printing System

1-4 C hapter 1
 Table 1-1 Printer Component Location

Location Component

Left and Right Side, Top Emergency Stop Buttons

Right Side, End Front and Back Pinch Roller Drive Assemblies

Carriage Drive Motor/Gear Box

Servo Controllers

Printer Controller CPU

UltraVu Workstation CPU

Power Supply System

Circuit Breakers

Rear Main Power Circuit Breaker

Material Detector

Material Feed Roller and Pinch Roller

Material Feed Encoder

Supply Roll Support Bar (Source)

Material Encoder

Left Side, End Primary Ink Tanks, Solvent Tank, and Waste Tank

Ink Pumps

Air Pressure Regulator

Air Solenoids

Capper Override Switch

Introduction 1-5
 Table 1-1 Printer Component Location (Continued)

Location Component

Carriage Assy Jet Driver Board

Carriage Interface Board

Carriage Backplane Board

Print Heads (Jet Packs)

Filters (Ink, Air, and Solvent)

Directional Solenoids

Secondary Ink Tanks

Edge Detector

Optical Linear Encoder Sensor

Jet Pack Heating Elements

Carriage Cooling Fans

Digital Manometer

Left Side, Upper Front Control Panel

Platen/Preheater and Media Dryer Controls

Print Head Capper

Front, Top Center Front Pinch Rollers

Media Dryer

Platen Preheater

IR Dryer

1-6 C hapter 1
Controls and Indicators
F igu re 1 -2 sh ow s the con trol p anel of the U ltraVu 33 60 . T he m ain
fu nctio ns of the C o ntro l P an el’s b utto n s a n d co n tro ls are ex p la in ed in
th e follo w ing p arag rap hs.

Figure 1-2 Control Panel Layout

Introduction 1-7
 Printer Function Buttons
R efer to F igu re 1-3 for the locatio n o f the printer fu nction b utton s on th e
C o ntrol P an el.
N o te: A b utton tha t is illum ina ted is "o n" un less oth erw ise n oted
below.

Figure 1-3 Function Buttons

Online Button
T he O nlin e b u tto n to g g les o n lin e and o fflin e o peration . S elec tin g
O ffline w ill susp end a ll op eratio ns in p rogress. W hile th e printer is
offlin e, y ou c an m ov e m ed ia fo rw ard and back w ard.

Test Button
T he Test B utton initia tes the p rinting o f o ne of six in terna l test p atte rn s.
It is u sed in con jun ction w ith on e o f th e P rin ter F u nctio n S e lector
S w itch te st pattern setting s.

Advance Button
T he A dva nce B u tto n is used to ad van ce the m ed ia. T h e sim ultane ous
activatio n of this b utton a nd th e Ten sion B utton w ill rev erse the
m aterial.

F Pinch Button
T his b utton e ngag es and d isen gag es the F ro nt P in ch R o llers. To fully
eng age ro llers yo u m u st d epress the butto n until its ligh t stop s flashing
and the alarm is no lon ger heard.

1-8 C hapter 1
B Pinch Button
T his b utton e ngag es and d isen gag es the B ack P inch R ollers. To fully
eng age ro llers yo u m u st d epress the butto n until its ligh t stop s flashing
and the alarm is no lon ger heard.

Tension Button
T his b utton ap plies and rem ov es tension to the m ed ia. T h e sim ultaneo us
activatio n o f this b utto n a n d th e A d v an ce B utto n w ill rev erse the
m aterial.

Color 1 Button (Black)

T his bu tto n activates an d d eactivates the se lecte d fun ction for th e B lack
In k S yste m .

Color 2 Button (Yellow)

T his b utton a ctiv ates an d deac tiv ates th e se lected fu nctio n fo r th e
Yellow Ink S y stem .

Color 3 Button (Cyan)

T his bu tton activates an d de-activates th e selected fun ction fo r th e C yan
In k S yste m .

Color 4 Button (Magenta)

T his b utton a ctiv ates an d deac tiv ates th e se lected fu nctio n fo r th e
M ag enta Ink S y stem .

Color 5 Button (Light Magenta)

T his b utton activates a nd d eactivates the selected fu nction fo r the C o lor
5 Ink S ystem .

Color 6 Button (Light Cyan)

T his b utton activates a nd d eactivates the selected fu nction fo r the C o lor
6 Ink S ystem .

Color 7 Button (Light Yellow)

T his b utton activates a nd d eactivates the selected fu nction fo r the C o lor
7 Ink S ystem .

Introduction 1-9
 Color 8 Button (Light Black)
T his b utton activates a nd d eactivates the selected fu nction fo r the C o lor
8 Ink S ystem .

Error Button
T he E rro r B u tto n w ill flash to in dicate a prin ter error con ditio n. To clea r
th e error con ditio n , d e p ress a n d rele ase this b u tto n . D ep ressin g the Test
B u tto n w ill reset the aud ible ala rm , bu t n ot th e erro r c ond ition . T he e rror
m essag e w ill d isplay o n the U ltraVu W o rk station m on itor. A list o f
erro rs can b e fou nd in C h apter 9, Tro ublesho oting .

Reset Button
T he R eset B utton resets the P rinte r C o ntroller and initiates a b oo t
sequ ence. It doe s n ot reset th e U ltra Vu W o rk station .

Power Button
T he P ow er B u tton p ow ers th e U ltraVu 3 36 0 prin ter o n or off. W hen
in itially tu rn ed O n , the Test B utton o n th e C on trol P ane l w ill
m om entarily flash . T h e H eater C o ntro l w ill briefly disp lay the
m axim u m allo w ab le tem p erature.
C a u tion : B efore sw itchin g th e P ow er B utto n off, the W in dow s N T
O p erating S ystem th at is ru nn in g o n the w o rkstation m ust be shu t d ow n .
F ailure to co rrectly shu t dow n W in dow s N T m a y resu lt in files b ecom in g
corru pted on the ha rd d rive.

1-10 C hapter 1
Printer Function Selector Switch
T he P rinter F un ctio n S elector S w itch (see F ig ure 1-4) p ro vides
fu nctio ns fo r op eratin g th e ink sy stem s allow ing the op erato r to p urg e
and test th e ink jets prio r to prin tin g. In ad ditio n, test p atte rn s can be
in itiated a n d the C ap per p o sitio n ed eith er u p o r d o w n .

Figure 1-4 Function Selector Switch

D u ring a p ause in p rinting , the op era tor can use the In k S yste m
fu nctio ns to clear up ink jet prob lem s. W he n any o f th ese fu nction s a re
selected, th e C arria ge w ill m ov e into th e m aintenan ce po sition.
N o te: D ep ressin g an d ho lding d ow n o ne of the co lor bu tto ns con trols
color selectio n. E a ch C o lo r B u tto n co ntrols th e tw o Jet P acks fo r tha t
color. D u rin g th ese fun ctions, on ly on e colo r b utton m a y b e dep ressed
at a tim e.
Auto Purge Setting T his fu nction pu rges ink from all P rint H e ads at th e
sam e tim e. P ressin g th e Test B u tto n w ith the F unc tio n S elector S w itc h
in this p osition w ill exe cute Test #1 .
Em pty Pack Setting T his fun ctio n is use d to rem ov e ink from the
S econ dary Tan ks a n d in k o r so lve n t fro m th e Jet P ack s. T his is d o n e b y
pressurizing th e S eco nd ary Ink Tank s. W h en active, the in k (o r solv ent)
is flush ed in to th e W aste C o nta iner.
N o te: T he S econ da ry Ink Ta nks do not g et flush ed w ith solvent.
Solvent Flush Setting T his fun ctio n is u sed to sen d cle an in g solven t
th ro ug h the Jet P ack and into the W aste C on tain er. In a ddition to
clea nin g th e Je t P a cks, this functiu on initially w ets th e su rfaces in side
th e Jet P ac k s. It is recom m en d ed th at th is fu n ctio n b e u se d b efore
prim in g w ith ink .

Introduction 1-11
 Solvent Purge Setting T h is fu nction is used to fo rce so lven t th ro ug h a
Jet P ack to clear ink from the Jet H ead s. T he S olven t P urge S etting is
in ten ded for clean in g and u nclog gin g th e Jet P a cks. It is also used to
in itially w et th e su rfaces in side th e Jet P ack b efo re prim in g w ith in k.
Ink Prim e Setting T h is fu nction fills the selected Jet P a cks w ith in k a nd
fo rc es the ov erflo w in to the W aste L ine assurin g th at th e Jet P ack s are
filled w ith in k. In k P rim e is useful in re m o ving air bu bb les from inside
th e Jet P ac k . It is recom m en d ed that this fu n c tio n b e co n tinu ed to b e
u sed u n til n o air b u b b les a re v isib le in the ink o f the W aste R eturn L in e.
T his fun ctio n is u se d fo r b u lk p rim ing the Jet P ack s an d sho uld n o t b e
used for lo ng p eriods o f tim e . T he ink th at is p um ped throu gh the Jet
P acks is sent to th e W a ste C on tainer.
Ink Purge Setting T his fun ction is used to fo rce ink to the su rface of th e
Jet P ack . T h e Ink P u rge S ettin g is used to p rim e th e Jet P ack s, a ssist in
re m o v in g air b u b b les fro m th e sy stem , a n d to clear clo gg in g in th e jet
orifices. A ir bu bb les a re usually present in the Jet P ack w h en a nu m ber
of the jets m isfire. U se Ink P urg e to restore th e jets. P ressin g th e Test
B u tto n w ith the F u n c tio n S electo r S w itc h in this p o sitio n w ill exec u te
Test # 1.
Fire Jets Setting T his fun ctio n fires the Jet P acks as th oug h yo u w ere
prin tin g a so lid color. To test fire the jets, a sh eet o f p aper is p laced un der
th e P rin t H ead and the desired colo r b utton is b riefly de pressed. T h e
prin ted p attern o n th e pap er w ill ind icate w hich jets a re w o rkin g and
w h ich are no t. A ir bu bbles are u su ally present in th e Jet P ack w h en a
nu m b er o f th e jets m isfire.
W A R N IN G : D o n ot u se th is fu n ction w ith o u t th e Jet P a cks bein g
covered as an in k spill a n d p oten tia l eye h azard w ill occu r.
Ready Setting T his fun ctio n pu ts th e printer in the R eady M od e. O nce
R ead y is selec ted, th e O nlin e B utton c an be activ ated . T he O nline
B u tto n m ust be illu m ina ted to start prin tin g.
Capper Down T h is se tting low ers th e C app er P late from the p rint h eads.
Cap Heads T h is settin g ra ises the C ap per P la te to cov er th e p rint h eads.
Test 1 T his test fires all 51 2 je ts fo r ea ch co lor. C olors a re sp aced ap art
so in d iv id ual jet o u tp u ts can b e v ie w ed .
Test 2 T his test fires all jets w ith n o sp acin g at 1 0 0 % d e n sity. It
p ro d u ces o n e- an d tw o -color b lo ck s in the spe cific p rin t m o d e
previou sly used fo r prin ting.

1-12 C hapter 1
Test 3 T he B i-D irection al A lig nm ent Test prin ts a series o f d ots (as
vertical lines), then steps th e m aterial an d rep eats th e pattern. T h e do ts
sho uld be vertically align ed. T h is test is u sed to se t the B i-D irection al
S etting s in the U ltraVu P rin ter S e tup S creen . T he v alue s can b e adjusted
th ro ug h the U ltraVu S e tup to w ith in 0.00 01 ”. F o r m o re in fo rm ation on
th is setting , see C h apter 3, O p era tio n.
N o te: T h ere are th ree m o des fo r the B i-D irectio na l Setting. E ach m o de
ha s a valu e tha t m u st be set.
Test 4 T his test prin ts a so lid 40 0% fo ur color b lack p attern in th e
specific m o de prev iou sly p rinte d.
Test 5 T he S te p A d justm e n t Te st p rints a series o f h o riz o n tal lin es,
step s the m aterial a nd p rints an oth er set o f ho rizon tal lin es. T he
ho rizon tal line seg m e nts sho uld app ear to be on e lin e (lin ed up
ho rizon tally). T h e horizo ntal distan ce is a dju stab le th ro ug h th e S te p
S ize P aram e ter on the U ltraVu S etu p S creen. T his v alu e can b e adjuste d
th ro u g h the U ltraVu S etu p to w ithin 0 .0 0 0 1 ”.
N o te: T h e Test B u tto n ca n also b e used to reset th e au dible a la rm du rin g
no rm a l opera tion .
Test 6 Jet A lig n m en t Test (fo r V U T E k S ervice E n g in eer u se o n ly).

Platen Preheater and M edia Dryer Controls

T he U ltraVu 3 3 6 0 D ig ital P rintin g S y stem s a re eq u ip ped w ith fo u r sets
of H eate r C on trols to p reh eat th e m ed ia and to d ry the in k (see F igu re 1-
5).

Introduction 1-13
 IR H eater

Figure 1-5 Preheater and Dryer Controls

T he H eate r C o ntro l L C D displa ys tw o n um bers w h en sw itched on . T h e

up per num b er represents the cu rrent tem peratu re o f th e heater an d the
lo w er num b er represents the op erator selectable target tem peratu re .
W h en th e prin ter O n/O ff S w itch is first tu rn ed o n, the H eater C on trol
L C D w ill b riefly disp lay the m axim u m allow able tem peratu re follow ed
by cu rren t values. B elow the n um bers o n th e L C D are fou r bu ttons: S et,
(↑), (↓) and (←). To o perate an y of these co ntrols y ou sh ou ld refer to
C h apte r 3, O p eratio n.

1-14 C hapter 1
Workstation Interface
T he U ltraVu 33 60 W o rk station su pp lie s all th e c ontro ls need ed to
o p era te th e p rin ter. T h e w o rk station is lin k e d to tw o sep arate C P U u nits:
P rinter C on troller U nit, w hich run s the firm w are that co ntro ls the p rinte r
in terfac e; and U ltraVu C o n tro l U n it, w hich ru n s W in d o w s-b a sed
softw are an d con nects to a lo cal area netw ork. T he w orkstatio n can b e
con nected to eith er C P U usin g a hardw are o r softw are sw itc h.

UltraVu Control Unit

T he U ltraVu C o ntrol U n it is a P e ntium -based P C runn in g W in do w s N T
and installe d in a n etw o rkin g env iron m e nt. In this m o de, the o perato r
can d ow nlo ad file s fro m the netw o rk a nd load im a ge data into th e
U ltraVu 33 60 for p rinting . T h e U ltra Vu C on trol softw are lets th e
op era tor decide w h ich im ag e to p rin t and h ow m an y cop ies to p rint. T he
scre en display ed w hen the U ltraVu C o ntrol U nit is in u se is sh ow n in
F igu re 1 -6 .

Figure 1-6 UltraVu Control Mode on the UltraVu Workstation

Introduction 1-15
 Printer Control Unit
T he P rin ter C on trol U n it is a separate P e ntium -based P C w h ich ru ns th e
V x W orks o p eratin g system and c o n tro ls the p rinte r th ro u g h the P rinter
C o ntroller B oard. T he P rinter C o ntrol S o ftw are allow s the op erator to
adjust p aram eters an d in itiate co m m an ds th at are sen t directly to th e
prin ter hardw are . T h e screen display ed in th is m od e is sho w n in F ig ure
1-7.

Figure 1-7 Printer Control Mode on the UltraVu Workstation

1-16 C hapter 1
Operator Requirem ents

The M ain O perator

T he U ltraVu 3 3 6 0 req uires o n e m ain o p erato r w h o w ill b e respo nsib le
fo r th e o p eratio n an d m ain ten an ce o f th e p rin ter. In o rd er to fu lfill th is
jo b, the can didate ch osen a s the m ain o perato r w ill n eed certa in skills.
H e o r she w ill b e e x p e cted to b e ab le to m ain tain the p rinte r an d p erfo rm
ro u tine m ainten an c e. T h is p erso n w ill a lso b e the com m u n ica tio n lin k
w ith th e V U T E k C usto m e r S u pp ort D ep artm ent, and sho uld be capab le
of pho ne-assisted prob lem solv in g and b asic repair. T he m ain o perato r
w ill b e cru cial to th e op era tio n of th e printer, an d sho uld be sele cted w ith
great care.

Main O perator Skill Requirem ents

T he follow in g is req uired o f the m ain o perato r:
• W ind ow s N T exp erience
• Tech nical bac kgrou nd inv olvin g ele ctronics and m ech anics.
• S peak s an d un derstan ds E ng lish
• C o lor aptitu de
T he follo w in g are d esirab le, b ut n o t essen tial:
• P rinting ex perien ce
• C o lor the ory exp erience
• F orm a l electro nics ed ucatio n
• P rep ress and P o stscript kno w ledg e

Other Operators
In add ition to th e m ain op era tor, oth er o perato rs w ill b e req uired , bo th
as help ers an d on se con d and third sh ifts. It is no t nec essa ry that these
o p era to rs p ossess the sk ill lev el o f th e m ain o p era to r. H ow ev er, an y o n e
w o rk in g w ith the U ltraVu 33 60 sho uld sh ow a m ech anical aptitu de and
hav e som e exp erience w ith printin g. It is im p ortan t th at th e p erson h ave
an ey e for distin gu ishing b etw een co lors.

Introduction 1-17
1-18 C hapter 1
 Chapter 2
Overview
••••••

Introduction
T his ch apter d escribes th e m ajor c om po nen ts and su bsystem s that
com p rise the U ltraVu 33 60 D ig ital P rin tin g S yste m . E ach o f th e
com p one nts d iscu ssed h ere is critical to th e succ essfu l o peration of th e
prin ter. M ajor c om po nen ts tha t w ill be d iscu ssed , include :
• Jet P ack A ssem b ly
• C arriage C o m po nen ts
• In k an d S o lv ent S ystem
• M o tors, S ervo s an d E nco ders
• P late n P reh eater and M edia D ry er
• P inch R oller S y stem (A ir S ectio n)
• E lectrical P ow er
You sh ou ld fam iliarize yo urself w ith th e fun ction o f each of these
com p o n e n ts.

O verview 2-1
Jet Pack Assem bly
T his sectio n describ es the m ajo r ch arac teristics o f th e Jet P ack
A ssem bly. T h e section b egins w ith a discussio n of the p iezo p rinciple,
th e c onc ept o f th e ink jet te chn olo gy u sed in the U ltraVu 33 60 P rin ter

Drop on Dem and Inkjets

T he U ltraVu 33 60 u ses c om pu ter-co ntro lle d piezoelectric p rin t he ad
assem blies to o utp ut eigh t chan nels o f in k in precisely con trolled
com b ina tio n s a n d p attern s. In con trast to th erm al in k jets, w hich u se h eat
to driv e in k fro m a ch am b er, a piezoelectric printin g sy stem uses p iezo
crystals w hich cha nge sh ape an d dim en sio n ever so slig htly w hen
stim u lated w ith an e lectrical cha rg e.
In drop -o n-dem an d p iezo ink jet syste m s, th e piezo cry stal reg ula tes th e
flow of in k by com p ressing the n ozzles from w hich th e in k is dep osited.
T he m icro n-sized drop lets of in k are squ eezed from ea ch n ozzle and are
com b ine d to form d ots o f varying ton es a nd d ensities.

Jet Pack Description

A n ind ividu al Jet P a ck con sists of o ne prin t head o f 25 6 jet o rifices (tw o
prin t head s p er ch ann el). R egardless o f th e nu m b er o f colors, there are
8 ch anne ls or 1 6 respective h eads in the carriage assem b ly. A n
in div id ual P ie zo cry stal d rives each jet.
E ach h ead is co n n ec ted to tw o in p u t and o ne o u tp u t in k lin e. E ach lin e
is u sed to sup ply ink to the jets w hen p rin tin g o cc u rs. T he inp ut/o u tp u t
lin e serv es a d u al p u rp o se: 1 ) to su p p ly in k to th e jets w h en p rin tin g , an d
2 ) to rem o v e ink w hen flu sh in g .
T he electrical c onn ection to each p rint h ead is v ia a boa rd ed ge
con nector that plu gs in to the C arriage B a ckp lane B oard.

Carriage Com ponents

T he carriage u nit (see F ig ure 2 -1 ) co nsists o f th e Jet P ack B o ard s,
C o oling F an s, E dg e D etecto r, Venturi, S o len oid P late, B ack pla ne
B o ard , H V A m p lifier B oa rd , an d C arriage Interface B o ard . T h e Je t P a ck
B o ard , C o oling F an s, E d ge D etecto r an d S ole noid P late w ill be
d iscu ssed in this sec tio n . T he Ven tu ri (v acu u m g en e rator) is d iscu ssed
in the ne xt section - In k an d S o lv ent S ystem s. T he rem ain ing C arriage
com p one nts, i.e. B ackp lan e B oard, H V A m plifer B o ard , an d C arriage

2-2 C hapter 2
In terface B oard, p ro vide the ele ctrical sig nalin g to the Jet P ack B oa rd s
th at ultim ately co ntro l th e p ro cess of d epo siting the in k. N o furth er
d escrip tio n w ill b e m a d e o f the se co m p o n ents.

Carriage

Figure 2-1 Carriage Assembly

Jet Pack Boards

F or a full d escrip tio n o f the jet p ac k b o ard s y ou sh o u ld refer to the
previou s sectio n.

Cooling Fans
T here are three fan s m o unted o n th e C arriag e tha t draw air in to the
carriage to rem ov e heat from the carriag e c om po nen ts. Tw o fans are
used to blow air across th e Je t D riv er an d C arriage Inte rface B oa rd s.
T he P rint H ead tem p erature is kep t co nstan t at 8 4°F ±1 °F by the third
fa n m o un ted o n th e side o f th e C arria ge A ssem b ly. Tw o ind icators o n
th e Jet D riv er B o ard ind icate th e state of the H eater/C o oler su bsy stem .
O n e ind icator is labeled ‘L ed #1 0 - C arriag e F an ’ and the other is labeled
‘L ed #11 - P rin t H e ad H ea ter ’. A co nstant tem peratu re he lps m ain tain
con sisten t in k viscosity as w ell as electro nic an d m echa nica l
perform an ces w ithin th e print head .

Edge Detector
T he E dg e D etecto r is a light em itting se nsor loc ated o n th e left side o f
th e C arriage A ssem bly (see F igu re 2-2). T h e P rinter C on troller u ses th e
senso r to d eterm in e the sta rt an d sto p edg es o f the m edia d urin g each
pass.

O verview 2-3
 C arriage
(left side)

Edge
D etector

Figure 2-2 Edge Detector

W h en off, the E dg e D etecto r w ill n ot d etect an edg e durin g prin ting,

th ereb y, ensurin g th e im age w ill m aintain an even m arg in th ro ug ho ut
th e im age . To p rint e d g e to e d g e (o r p an els) the E d g e D etecto r m ust b e
activated.
You sh ou ld refe r to C hap ter 3 , O peration , for m aterial lo ading
in fo rm ation a nd C h apter 5 , M a intenan ce, for th e E d ge D etector
S ensitiv ity A djustm en t details.

Solenoid Plate
F or inform atio n on the S oleno id P late, refer to “S o len oids” in the n e x t
section .

Ink and Solvent System

Ink and Solvent Control

R efer to F igures F ig ure 2-3 throu gh 2-5 for a view o f the ink and solv ent
con trol co m pon ents o n th e C arriage. To acc ess these com p one nts, th e
cov er o n th e c arriag e m u st b e rem o v e d (fo u r la tch e s fasten the co v er).
B etw een the C arriag e a nd th e In k S up ply P late is a series o f tube s an d
m anifo lds used to d eliv er th e ink , solv ent, and air to th e p rint hea ds. T he
sup ply system for each colo r h as fo ur con trol so len oids, an in -lin e filter,
a secon dary in k and ink leve l sensors. T h ere is o ne m aster solen oid in
th e S o lve nt S up ply S y stem . T h e In k L evel S en sors are com p rised of

2-4 C hapter 2
float sw itches lo cated inside th e S eco nd ary Tan ks. To m aintain ink
prim e in the Jet P ack s, a Venturi supp lies v acuu m to th e S ec ond ary
Tan ks. T h e fo llo w ing sectio n details the fu nctio ns of the in divid ual
com p one nts of th e Ink and S olven t C o ntrol S y stem .
N o te: T he float sw itch es ca n beco m e covered w ith dry in k resultin g in
float m alfu nction .

Vacuum Venturi S o lv e n t F ilte r C a rriage Interface B oa rd

S econda ry In k Tan k S olenoid

S olenoid

Ink F ilte r

Figure 2-3 Ink and Solvent Carriage Components

O verview 2-5
 Solenoids
T h ere are 25 so len oid s o n th e U ltraVu 336 0 C arriag e. E ach is u sed to
g ate ink, solven t, air, and v acu um thro ugh the In k and S o lv ent S y stem .
A typ ical so len oid is show n in F igu re 2-4.

Solenoid

Figure 2-4 Carriage Showing Solenoids (Rear Plate Viewed From Top)

Air and Solvent Lines

T h e air an d solven t lines are co m m o n to all co lors, isola ted b y th eir
respec tiv e solen oids. T h e In -L ine F ilters ha ve an 8 µm m esh filter
elem ent and are placed in-line w ith th e A ir, In k an d S olven t F eed L in es.
T h e ink filters, located in the in k lines, shou ld b e rep lace d every th re e
m o nth s. T h e air an d solven t filters shou ld b e rep laced on an a nnu al
b asis.
N ote: T he Seco nd ary Ink R eservoirs h old ap pro xim ately 20 cc o f in k
u nd er n orm al o peratin g con ditio ns.

Printer Selector Switch Logic

F ig ure 2-5 sho w s th e Ink and S olven t C o ntrol D iag ra m an d its
asso ciated lo gic. T he fig ure is useful for sh ow ing the relatio nship
b etw een th e sole n o id s d escrib ed ab o v e an d sele cted fun ctio n s o n the
P rinter F un ctio n S e lector S w itch . T his sw itch selec ts w hich jet fu nctio n
w ill occu r w hen an ind iv idu al co lor butto n is dep ressed . T h e table
sh ow s th e F ire Jet, Ink P u rg e, S olven t P u rge and E m p ty P ack fu nctio ns
for on e co lo r - C yan .

2-6 C hapter 2
 2-WAY
SOLENOID,
CARRIAGE, FRONT VIEW 4 P9275-A SOLVENT IN
SHOWING COLOR 1
ALL CHANNELS ARE THE SAME SOLVENT BLOCK
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8
FILTER
PRES.

VENTURI VAC. AIR IN

FILTER

3-WAY
SOLENOID,
AA70153 VACUUM

VACUUM
OVERFLOW
3
CAN

2 1
To
Secondary
3-WAY
SOLENOIDS,
AA70152
Ink Tanks
All 8 Colors

INK IN TO JETPACKS

R
LTE
FI

INK OUT

INK IN FROM INK BLOCK

Function Ink Color* (Cyan) Solvent

Switch Setting Sol #1 Sol # 2 Sol #3 Sol #4
Fire jet ink ink vacuum inactive
Ink purge ink ink air inactive
Solvent purge solvent solvent air active
Empty pack ink ink air inactive

* N ote: Ta b le rep re se n ts a ll co lo rs.

Figure 2-5 Ink and Solvent Control Diagram

N o te: T he P rinter m ust be o ff-line to activate any o f th ese fun ctions.

O verview 2-7
 Prim ary Ink and Solvent Tanks
T he P rim ary In k Ta nks co nsist of eigh t 4 -liter tan ks an d on e solv ent tan k
lo cated inside th e Ink S u pp ly C o m partm en t (see F ig ure 2-6).

C olor 1 C olor 3 C olor 5 C olor 7

Solvent

C olor 2 C olor 4 C olor 6 Color 8

Waste

Figure 2-6 Ink Tray

In k an d solv ent a re p u m ped from the P rim ary Tan k In k S u p p ly L in es

(see F igu re 2-7) th ro ug h the U m bilical A ssem b ly to the S e con dary Ink
Tan ks lo cated on the C arriag e. W he n th e Jets are electrically activated,
in k is d raw n fro m the S eco n d ary Tan k s an d d e p o sited o nto th e p rint
m ed ia. S o m e p o rtio n o f the in k a n d solv ent is n o t u se d ; this is returned
to the P rim a ry Tank s throu gh th e In k R eturn L in es.

Ink C ircu lato r Level S ensor

Ink P um p

In k O ut Ink In

Figure 2-7 Ink Tray - Close-up

2-8 C hapter 2
T he P rim ary In k Tank s are eq uip ped w ith level senso rs to detect an “in k
ou t” co nd ition . T h is is a no n-term inal erro r, allo w in g the p rint fu nction
to b e resu m e d after refilling the tank w ith ink . T h e w aste h oldin g tan k
also co ntain s an interna l se nsor fo r detecting a fu ll co nd ition , in dic atin g
to the op erator w h en th e tan k need s to be em p tied .

Ink Pum ps
S elf-p rim ing p um ps m oun ted o n th e Ink S up ply P late sup ply ink to the
S econ dary Ink Tank s (F igu re 2 -6 ). E ach p um p c onsists of tw o cham be rs
and a co m m on d iaph ra gm w orking in a pu sh pu ll m ann er. T his
arran gem en t a llo w s fo r tw o p um p s to b e co ntain ed in on e h ou sing . T he
pu m p pu lls in k fro m the P rim ary In k Tan k w h ene ver the ink level in the
S econ dary Tan k b ec o m es too low. W h en in k is lo w a se n so r d ete cts its
con ditio n an d sign als th e Jet D rive r B oard to tu rn on th e pu m p to fill th e
S econ dary Ink Ta nk, W h en th e in k lev el re aches th e upp er lim it, th e
p u m p s turns o ff. T h e n et effect is th at th e p u m p is o n ly o n w he n the
S econ dary Ink Ta nk o n th e C arriag e need s ink .
T he In k S up ply S ystem tim e s o ut w hen the req u e st fo r in k lasts lo n g er
th an ten se con ds. T h is error con ditio n preve nts ov erfilling the
S econ dary Tan ks.
N o te: F illing the Secon dary Ink Tan ks m a y take ten secon ds or m o re.

Solvent Tank
T he S olven t Tan k supp lies the U ltraVu In k S olven t used for the
clea nin g and purg in g of the je ts (see F ig ure 2 -6 ). T he S olven t Tan k is
pressurized and h as a level sen sor b uilt in. T h e A ir P ressure R eg ulator
fo r this system is located directly ab ov e the S olven t Tan k on the Ink
S u p p ly P la te and is se t to b etw een 2 an d 3 p si. T he S olven t Tan k
R eg ula tor also p ro vid es air p re ssu re for the p urge fun ction at the sam e
pressure lev el.
C a u tion : D o n ot ad just th is regu lator h ig her than 5 psi. D o not o pen th e
So lven t Tan k w hen the tank is p ressurized.

Air Pressure Regulators and Solenoids

T he M ain P ressu re R e gulato r is lo cate d in the up per left corner of the
In k S up ply P late (se e F igure 2-8) and is set b etw een 8 0 and 1 00 p si.
N ex t to the M a in R eg ulato r is th e S o lv ent an d th e P inch R oller
R eg ula tors. T h e S o lve nt R e gulato r is used to set air pressure fo r th e

O verview 2-9
 S olv ent S y stem . T h e P inch R oller R e gulato rs are u sed for setting th e
bail pressu re an d a re no rm ally set betw een 4 0 an d 60 p si for the rear a nd
b etw een 5 0 an d 7 0 p si fo r the fro n t, b u t w ill v a ry d ep en din g o n th e
m aterial b ein g prin ted . It is im po rtant to set th e pressures co rrectly, or
po or trac kin g an d w rin kling w ill occu r.
T he rem aining reg ulator is the C a ppe r P late R egu lato r. T his regu lates
th e air p ressu re to th e C ap per P late C o ntro l S o leno id and sh ould b e set
betw een 40 an d 60 p si. F low restrictors in th e air lin es w ill slow the
C ap per m o vem en t to a safe leve l.
A ll th e so len oid s m o un ted o n th e ink su pp ly p late can be m anu ally
op era ted w ith an elec trical o verride co ntrol. To activate the soleno id,
p ress the sm all b lu e b utto n o n the lo w er h alf o f the so len o id a ssem b ly.
T his w ill e nergize th e so leno id and allow airflow w hen the prin ter is o n.

Main B Pinch

Left Side

F Pinch Capper

Main Solvent F Pinch B Pinch Capper

Regulator Regulator Regulator Regulator Regulat

media Tension Capper

Right Side

F Pinch

Capper F Pinch
Media Vacuum Solenoid Solenoid
Tension Regulator
B Pinch
Regulator Solenoid

Figure 2-8 Air Pressure Regulators and Solenoids

2-10 C hapter 2
A C ap per O v errid e S w itch (see F ig ure 2-9) is p ro vided to m anu ally
ra ise and low er th e C ap per for m a intenan ce. T his is particularly useful
w h en clear ac cess to the Jet P ack s is need ed. F or norm al o peration , th e
sw itch sh ould be in th e ’N o rm al O pe ration ’ p osition .

Capper
Override
Switch

Figure 2-9 Capper Override Switch

Venturi
T he S ec ond ary Ink Tan ks o n the carria ge w ork u nd er a sm all vac uum
(-0.2 5 psi) by m ea ns of a Ven tu ri. T he Ven tu ri is su pp lied w ith air via an
elec tronic pne um atic reg ula tor loc ated in th e In k S u pp ly C a bin et (see
F igu re 2 -1 0). It uses air pressure to create a va cuu m .
To p reven t in k from b eing d raw n fro m the S eco n d a ry In k Ta n k s into th e
Venturi, an ov erflo w tan k is used . T h e vacu um is fed into a secon dary
in k con tainer b ein g used as an O ve rflo w C o ntainer. T h is con tain er
collects an y in k settlin g in to the Vacu um S y stem before it reach es the
Venturi. A lev el detecto r in the co ntain er de tects w hen the O v erflow
C o ntainer is fu ll. W he n d etectio n o ccurs, an error co nd ition occ urs and
th e sy stem shuts d ow n.

O verview 2-11
 Venturi

Venturi O verflow Tank

Figure 2-10 Venturi and Overflow Tank

Capper Plate
T he C ap per P late is an air actu ated co ver fo r th e P rin t H ead s (see F igu re
2-11). Its pu rp ose is to lim it the ex posu re o f th e ink to co ntam inates.
W h en th e prin ter is n ot in use or is offlin e, the C arriage w ill park in its
“ho m e” positio n an d th e jets w ill p urge ink in to the C ap per P late.
A p prox im ately ten se con ds after th e C arriage p ark s, th e C app er P la te
w ill lift to co ver the P rint H eads.
N o te: W h en no t in u se, the H ead C o ver P la te m u st be covered w ith
plastic w rap a nd p la ced on the C a pp er P late.
T he air pressure used b y th e C app er P late is con tro lled by a regu lator
lo cated on th e In k S up ply P late. T he regu lator shou ld be set at 4 0 p si of
air pressure. W hen a p rint fun ctio n or a m a intenan ce fu nction is
in itiated , the C ap per P late w ill au to m a tica lly d ro p aw ay fro m th e P rin t
H ea ds. T he sp eed at w hich the C app er P late lifts is adjuste d b y a sc rew
on the R estricto r Valv e loc ated o n th e A ctu ato r (air cylind er).

2-12 C hapter 2
 Capper Plate

Figure 2-11 Capper Plate

Motors, Servos and Encoders

Motors
T he C arriag e is co nn ecte d to the M ain D riv e P u lle y by a rein fo rced ,
to oth ed, C arriage D rive B elt. T h e M ain D riv e P u lley is lin ked d irectly
to a 9 0 -d egree w orm sty le g ea rb o x a n d is d riv en b y the b ru sh le ss servo
m oto r w ith a b uilt-in e nco der. T he X S ervo C on tro ller m ana ges th e
C arriage D rive S erv o M o tor (see F ig ure 2-12).

Figure 2-12 X Servo Motor

O verview 2-13
 T he B ack F ee d R o ller is con trolled by th e R ear Y S erv o D rive M otor. A
b u ilt-in enc o d e r is u sed to d e term ine th e p o sitio n o f th e m o to r at an y
tim e. T he Y S ervo C on tro ller m ana ges th e Y S ervo M otor.
T he F ro nt Ten sio n R o lle r is d riv en b y a third S ervo M oto r (see F ig u re
2-13 ). T he m otor is used to m ain tain ten sio n on the m ed ia. It is m a nag ed
by a sim ilar S ervo C on troller.

Air Lift
C ylinder

M otor

Figure 2-13 F Pinch Roller Drive System

A n air-actu ated cylin der is u sed to m aintain ten sion on th e m edia du ring
p rin tin g . S ee F ig ure 2 -8 fo r th e locatio n o f the reg ulato r u sed to reg ulate
th e p re ssu re to th is cylin d er. D ep en d ing o n ten sio n req u ire m e n ts, the
re g u lato r sho uld b e b e tw ee n 1 0 an d 4 0 p si

2-14 C hapter 2
Servo Controllers
T he prin ter uses th ree servo co ntro lle rs: an X S ervo C on troller for
carriage m otion and p ositio nin g; a Y S ervo C on tro ller for the feeding
and positio ning the m aterial o n th e m a chin e; an d a secon d Y S erv o
C o n troller fo r d riv ing the F ro n t Ten sion M oto r.
A ll serv os com m un icate w ith th e P rin ter C on trol U nit C P U th ro ug h
R S 2 3 2 cab les. A lth o u g h the S erv o C o n tro lle rs are iden tica l u n its, the y
are co n fig u red an d p ro g ram m ed d iffe ren tly throu gh the u se o f serv o
param eters files fou nd in th e firm w are. O ne useful fea ture of th e S ervo
C o ntrollers is th e no n-vo latile fa ult co de m em o ry w hich stores th e error
cod es fo r all m o tio n an d p o sitio n in g failu res the p rinte r h as in curred .
F ig u re 2 -1 4 sho w s th e lay o u t for the S erv o C o n tro lle rs.

Front Y Servo R ear Y Servo X Servo

C ontroller (Tension) Controller (Feed) C ontroller (C arriage)

Figure 2-14 Servo Controllers

T he fun ctio n of the X S ervo C on troller is to con trol an d m on ito r th e

serv om o tor driving the C arriag e. T he X S ervo C on troller is co nn ected
to the m otor throu gh fou r po w er lead s. T he p ositio nin g feedb ack is
th ro ug h a 1 5-con du cto r R S 23 2-sty le cable from th e intern al M o to r
E nco der to the S erv o C o ntroller U nit. T he in com in g po w er to the X
S erv o C o ntroller is a d irect A C con nection . P ow er p asses throu gh an
E M I F ilter, a c ircuit breaker and a relay before feed in g th e X S ervo
C o ntroller.

O verview 2-15
 T he X S ervo C ontro ller co nne cts to the C P U th ro ug h an R S 2 32 cab le.
O ther con nection s to th e X S erv o C o ntroller includ e the le ft an d righ t
lim it sw itch es, an d the E m erge ncy S to p B u tto ns. In the case of a se rv o
fa u lt o r the E m erg en cy S to p B utto n b eing p u shed , sy stem p o w er w ill b e
cut o ff. A red light on th e con troller w ill ind icate a loss of sign al fro m
an en cod er.
T he fu n c tio n o f the R ear Y S ervo C o n tro ller (F e ed ) is to con trol an d
m onito r th e se rv om otor that d rives th e M ed ia F e ed R o ller. T h e S ervo
C o ntroller un it is ide ntical to its X S ervo cou nter pa rt w ith the ex ception
of the S ervo P aram eter F ile. T he S erv o P aram eter F ile for th e Y S ervo
C o ntroller holds th e p aram e ters n eede d to p ro vid e th e m ed ia feed
action .
T he in com in g p ow e r to the Y S erv o C o n tro lle r p asses th ro u g h th e E M I
filter, th e c ircuit breaker, and rela y before feed in g th e Y S e rv o
C o n troller. T he Y S e rv o C on troller is c o n n ecte d to the m oto r thro u g h
fo u r p o w er leads. T he p o sitio n ing feed b ac k is v ia a 1 5-co n d u c tor
R S 23 2-style cable from the inte rn al m oto r en cod er to the Y S ervo
C o ntroller. F eedb ack co m es from the R o tary F eed E n cod er.
O th er co n n ectio n s to th e S erv o C on trollers in clu de the E m erg en cy S to p
B u tto ns. O ne pole o f th e E m ergen cy S top B u tton also b reak s the su pp ly
to th e M a in C on tactor. In th e case of a se rv o fault o r th e E m ergen cy S top
B u tto n b eing p ush ed, se rv o system p o w er w ill b e cu t o ff. T h e
E m ergen cy S top B utton is a 2 4-Vo lt high side sw itch that
sim ultan eou sly send s a signa l to the prin ter C P U and the S erv o
C o ntrollers.

Motor Encoders
B o th th e M ed ia F eed R o ller D riv e M otor an d C arriag e D rive M o to r
hav e built in ro tary en cod ers. Tw o extern al enc ode rs, o ne o n th e
C arriage R a il an d the o th er on the M edia F eed R oller, v erify e ach
serv o’s p ositio n.

Y Servo Rotary Encoder

T his o ptical en cod er m easures th e step distan ce of the m edia. T h e
enco der fee ds the p ositio nin g da ta directly to th e Y S ervo C on troller.
T he step size fo r the enco der is prog ram m able throu gh the U ltraVu
P ro gram . To a dju st th e step size, see C ha pter 3, O p eratio n.
N o te: A ny co nta m inatio n of th e E n cod er W heel can in du ce slipp ag e a nd
m a y cau se ina ccura te step read ing s.

2-16 C hapter 2
 B ecau se th is enc oder feeds d irectly bac k to the Y S erv o C o ntro lle r, an y
lo ss o f re adin g (th ro u g h w he el slip p ag e o r step erro r) fro m th e m aterial
w ill prod uce a step error. If the fe ed ro lle r adv ances th e m aterial and the
enco der do esn ’t de tect m o tio n, a step erro r w ill o ccur.
C a u tion : If the enco der is no t in con tact w ith the m aterial and is
allow ed to rotate, th e M edia F eed R oller w ill ro ta te ou t of contro l at a
very high sp eed un til an error con ditio n is detected .

X Servo Optical Encoder

T he X S ervo M otor uses an o ptical en cod er m o un ted o n th e C arriage to
verify th e C arriage po sition o n th e R ail. T h e O ptical E n cod er u ses an
op tic al strip that ru ns th e fu ll leng th o f the p rinte r (see F igu re 2 -1 5). T h is
strip, w hic h is m o unted at th e fron t o f the C arriag e R ail, con tain s op tica l
m ark ers, givin g th e strip a re so lu tio n of 5 µm .

Head

S trip

Figure 2-15 Optical Encoder Head and Strip

A n O p tical P icku p S en so r th at d etects th e m arks is m oun ted on th e rear

of the C a rriag e. T h e P icku p S e nsor send s a sig nal b ack to the C P U
th ro ug h the C arriag e In terfac e C ard .

Platen Preheater and M edia Dryer

T he U ltraVu 3 36 0 D igital P rin tin g S yste m s are equ ip ped w ith three sets
of h eaters fo r preh eating th e m e dia an d drying th e ink (see F igu re 2 -1 6).
T he P laten P reh eate r w arm s the m edia before the ink is ap plied. T he
M ed ia D ry er is u se d to he at the fre sh ly prin ted m e dia in order to speed

O verview 2-17
 th e d ry in g proce ss. S om e su bstrates w ill on ly w ork efficien tly w h en
heated. T he th ird he ater is a n In frared (IR ) hot-a ir b low er m o unted o n
th e front of the prin ter.

P reheater

M e d ia
D ryer

Figure 2-16 Platen Preheater and Media Dryer

B o th th e P laten P rehe ater a nd the M ed ia D rye r transfer h eat by m e ans

of con duc tio n. In the case of the P la ten P re heater, th e m e dia co m es in
con tact w ith th e heated P late n im m ediately before and d urin g th e
p rin tin g p ro c ess, w arm in g th e m aterial b e fo re in k is ap p lied . A s a
prin ted im ag e m ov es ac ro ss th e surface o f th e D ry er, heat is transferred
to the m edia to dry the in k before it leaves th e printer. T he IR D ryer
p ro v ide s im m ed iate d ry in g fo r h ig h sp eed o r d e n se p rin tin g . A set o f
fa ns coo l the m ed ia before it leaves th e prin ter (see F igu re 2 -1 7).

F ans
IR Dryer (inside)

Figure 2-17 Dryer and Cooling Fans

2-18 C hapter 2
Pinch Roller System (Air Section)
A ir pressure is used to eng age and d iseng age th e B ack and F ron t P in ch
R o llers. T h e M ain P ressu re R e gulato r is lo cated in th e u pp er left co rn er
o f th e Ink S u p p ly P late (se e F ig u re 2 -1 8 ) a n d is set b etw een 8 0 an d 1 00
psi. To the rig ht o f th e M ain R egu lator a re th e P inch R oller R egu lators.
T he P in ch R o ller R eg ulators a re used fo r settin g the b ail p ressu re an d
are n orm a lly set b etw een 40 and 6 0 psi fo r th e rear and b etw een 50 an d
60 p si fo r the fron t.

M ain R egulator
Front Pinch R egulator
Back Pinch R egulator

Figure 2-18 Regulators

O verview 2-19
Electrical Power
M ain P ow e r is sup plied to the U ltraVu 3 360 throu gh the M ain
D isco n n ect S w itch (3 -P h ase, 5 0 A m p ) o n th e rea r o f the m ach in e (see
F igu re 2 -1 9).

M ain
D isco nnect
S w itch

Figure 2-19 Main Disconnect

W A R N IN G : Trip pin g th e M a in D iscon n ect S w itch d oes n ot rem ove

po w er to th e A ccess P an el at th e rear of th e prin ter (see F igu re 2 -2 0).
If w o rk m u st b e don e th rou g h th is p an el, th e prin ter m u st be
u n p lu gg ed or fu ll lin e vo lta ge w ill b e p resen t

Access Panel

Figure 2-20 Power Access Panel

A 3 -p h ase p lu s n eu tral lin e filte r is m ou nted d irectly b eh in d th e P o w er

A cc ess P anel. T he filter p ro vid es E M I p ro tectio n ag ain st electric al n oise
gen erated o n th e lin e from oth er ex ternal so urces, su ch as in dustrial
m oto rs. Vutek uses a S ch affn er F N 2 56 -6 4-52 for this fun ction (see
F igu re 2 -2 1).

2-20 C hapter 2
 Figure 2-22 Line Filter

T he p o w e r is b ro u g h t into th e E lectrical C ab in e t (w h ere th e C P U

m odu les are loca ted ) and is branch ed in three directio ns throu gh C B 1,
C B 2 , an d C B 3 (see F ig ure 2 -2 2).

CB1

CB2
CB3

CB4 CB5

CB6

Figure 2-22 Circuit Breakers

C B 1 (10 A m p) CPUs
C B 2 (20 A m p) S ervo M otors

C B 3 (20 A m p) P reheater and D ryer #1

C B 4 (10 A m p) D ryer #2
C B 5 (10 A m p) D ryer #3

C B 6 (40 A m p) IR H eater

O verview 2-21
2-22 C hapter 2
 Chapter 3
Operation
••••••

Introduction
T his ch apter d escrib es h o w to u se the U ltraVu 3 3 6 0 P rin ter a n d the
U ltraVu C on trol P rog ram . Top ics cov ere d in clud e:
S tartin g an d S h uttin g D o w n
• S tartin g th e P rin ter
• S hutting O ff th e P rin ter
• R eco v erin g fro m an E m erg e n cy S to p
W orking w ith In k, M edia, an d P rinte r S etu p
• C h ang ing the 8 -C o lo r / 4-C o lo r M o de
• L oad in g M aterial
• W orking w ith M ultip le R o lls
• P rep aring the Jet P ack s for P rin tin g
• R eco v erin g fro m P lu g g e d Jets
• U sing the Jet P ack C leaning S ystem
• U sing the M ed ia H o ld D ow n P late
U n derstan ding P rinter C o ntro ls
• U sing the In ternal Test P attern s
• O p era tin g th e H eater C o ntro ls
• O p era tin g th e M ed ia C oo lin g F an s
• U n derstan ding th e P rin t S peed s
• U n derstan ding th e P rin t M o des
Im p ro vin g P rint Q uality
• S etting the P rint G ap
• A d ju stin g th e S tep S etting s
• W orking w ith P rehe ater S ettin gs
• W orking w ith M edia D ryer S ettings
• A d ju stin g M ed ia Ten sion S ettings

O peration 3-1
 • M an aging Jet O utage
• C o ndu cting Trial R u ns
• W orking w ith R IP F ile R e so lu tio ns
• S etting the C arriag e H eig ht
• A d ju stin g th e E n cod er W heel
• C o m p ensatin g fo r H o rizon tal B and ing

Starting and Shutting Down

Starting the Printer

To start the prin ter, press the C o ntrol P an el’s P ow er B utton to O n (see
F igu re 3 -1 ). E nsure th at bo th E -S top (E m ergen cy S to p) B utton s are
fu lly ou t.

Shutting Off the Printer

P rior to sh uttin g off th e printer, b e sure to sh ut do w n the N T O p eratin g
S ystem o n the U ltraVu W orkstatio n . To sh u t o ff th e p rinter, p ress the
C o ntrol P an el’s P ow er B utton to O ff.
C a u tion : M ake sure you h ave prop erly shu t do w n th e U ltraVu
Wo rkstation before p ushing the P ow er B u tto n on the C ontro l P an el.
O therw ise, T he N T O p eratin g System m a y crash.

Recovering from an Em ergency Stop

R esettin g th e E m e rg en c y S to p (E -S top ) B u tto n an d d ep ressin g the E rro r
B u tto n w ill reset th e E -S to p con ditio n.
N o te: Yo u sho uld w ait 15 second s a fter the E -Sto p bu tton h as been
pu shed b efo re trying to m a ke a reco very.

3-2 C hapter 3
Working with Ink, Media, and Printer Setup

Changing the 8-Color / 4-Color M ode

T he U ltraVu 33 60 p rinter (E igh t C o lo r M o del O nly) ca n op erate in o ne
of tw o colo r m od es: 8-C o lo r or 4-C olor. T he 8 -C o lo r M o de uses
C M Y K -L ig ht C Y M K colored in ks and is intended fo r h igh resolution
prin tin g. T he 4-C olor M od e u ses o nly C Y M K colored in ks, b ut p rints at
tw ice th e speed o f th e 8-C olor M od e.

To chan ge th e p rin ter from 8-color op eration to 4- color operation

(or 4-color operation to 8-color operation ) you w ill n eed to p erform
th ese steps:
1 From the Main Menu
Select Channels
Click Change Channel Mode
T his o pen s the E ig ht C o lo r / F ou r C o lor M od e W ind ow (see F igu re 3 -1 ).

Figure 3-1 Eight Color / Four Color Mode Window

2 From the window

Select 8 Color M ode or 4 Color M ode
Click OK
3 Using the Printer Selector Switch on the Control Panel (see Figure 3-
2 and 3-4), perform an ’Empty Pack’ operation followed by a ’Purge’
operation for Colors 5, 6, 7, and 8.
T his w ill rem ov e all p rev io us stored ink fro m the S econ dary In k Tan ks
and In k L ine s located on the C arriag e.

O peration 3-3
 You have now successfully com pleted the changeover.

Loading M aterial

To load m aterial you shou ld refer to F igu res 3-2 thru 3-6 an d
p erform th ese step s:
1 Depress the F Pinch and B Pinch Button to release the Front and
Back Pinch Rollers.

F Pinch
B Pinch Power

Figure 3-2 Control Panel

2 Place the media on the Source Roller. To do this you need to remove
the Source Shaft from the rear of the machine.

3-4 C hapter 3
 Roll C huck

Media Placement

R oll C ollar

Shaft

Brake

Figure 3-3 Source Roller removed from rear of Printer

3 Place Media Roll over Source Roller. Push the roll over the Roll
Chuck until it stops against Roll Collar. The Roll Chuck’s Grip Cores
will latch against the inside of the media roll to hold the material
securely in place.

R oll C huck

G rip C ores M edia R oll

Figure 3-4 Putting Media Roll onto the Source Shaft

O peration 3-5
 4 Re-install the Source Shaft back onto the machine. Position the Roll
Collar against the end of the media and tighten the Roll Collar Set
Screw.
5 With your right hand grab the end of the roll and twist unit forward 1/4
turn (see Figure 3-5).
T his lock s the R o ll S haft in p lace .

Twist 1/4 Turn

Source Roll

Figure 3-5 Locking the Roll Chuck

6 Unroll the media from the Source Roller and feed the material into the
Back Pinch Rollers as shown. Allow the material to hang down to the
Source Roll and align the edges of the material to the edges of the
Source Roll and close the Back Pinch.
T his w ill en sure that the m aterial is co m ing straigh t off the S o urce R oll.

3-6 C hapter 3
 Figure 3-6 media Feed Path (side view)

7 Close the Front Pinch and turn on the tension.

8 Using the Advance Button, feed material through the Front Pinch
Rollers.
9 Open the Front Pinch Rollers and pull the material until there are no
wrinkles and it lies flat on the Platen.
10 Close the Front Pinch Rollers and apply tension

Working with Multiple Rolls

W h en prin tin g on m o re th an on e m ed ia ro ll, care m ust b e taken to avo id
un equ al im ag e leng th s. S inc e a ll rolls u se the sam e M ed ia S ou rce
R o llers, d ifferen t diam eter ro lls can ca use difference s in the m aterial
fe ed rate. W he n m u ltiple ro lls share th e sa m e S ou rc e R ollers, on e ro ll
can resist m o v e m en t o f the o th er cau sin g m aterial fee d p ro b lem s. If the
m ed ia rolls are n ew an d are o f e q u a l len g th an d thick n ess, p rin tin g can
proce ed no rm ally. If the rolls are un equ al d iam eters, b est re sults are
achieve d by u sing an extern al m ateria l crad le (beh ind the p rinte r).

O peration 3-7
 A n o th er m etho d w ou ld b e to u n ro ll and fan -fold th e m ateria l u n d er th e
m achine to m inim ize resistance fro m m u ltiple m ed ia rolls. B y fan -
fo ld ing the m a terial m ultip le ro lls are less lik ely to c reate stepp ing errors
or une qua l len gth seg m ents ca used b y fee din g th e m ed ia at d ifferen t
ra tes.

Preparing the Jet Packs for Printing

B efore an y p rintin g o p era tio n o ccurs y o u w ill n eed to p ro p erly care for
th e jet pa cks.

Jet Preparation Procedure

To p rep are the Jet P ack s p erform th ese step s:

1 Power up the printer.
2 Select Capper Down on the Printer Function Selector Switch (see
Figure 3-7).
T his w ill cause th e C app er P late to d ro p from th e P rin t H ea ds.
N o te: If th e prin ter is po w ered up w ith the P rin ter F un ction S elector
Sw itch in th e R ead y p ositio n, the C arria ge w ill pa rk itself over th e
C a pper P la te. T he C a pper P la te w ill then lift to co ver the P rin t H ea ds
after a 10 -seco nd d ela y.

Figure 3-7 Printer Selector Switch

3 With the Capper in the lowered position, remove the polyethylene

wrap and Capper Pad covering the Jet Packs. Discard the wrap.
4 Wipe all the Jets with a solvent-soaked wipe to remove any dried ink.
5 Select Ink Purge on the Printer Selector Switch and press the Color
Buttons, one color at a time, until all Jet Packs have been purged.

3-8 C hapter 3
6 Apply Head Cleaning Solvent to a VUTEk approved cloth (PN P9450-
A) and clean the head surfaces of all jets.
7 Using the cloth, gently wipe the Jet Pack surfaces.
8 Move the Printer Function Selector Switch to the Fire Jets position.
9 Place a sheet of white paper under the Jet Packs and quickly depress
each color button to verify that the jets are firing correctly.
10 Select Test 1 and depress the Test Button. Print one line and press
the Test Button to stop. If jets are still not present, then repeat steps
4 thru 10. When satisfied with the performance of the Jet Packs, move
the Printer Function Selector Switch to the Ready position.
T he U ltraVu 33 60 P rin ter is n ow read y to b e put onlin e.

Jet Pack Covering Procedure

W h en th e prin ting op eratio n is finished for th e sh ift o r the day, th e P rint
H ea ds m ust be cov ered . To preven t the ink fro m dryin g in the jets, y ou
m ust p e rfo rm a sim p le cov erin g p ro ced u re.
N o te: If the p rinter is go in g to be p ow ered o ff for m ore tha n a day, Vutek
reco m m end s tha t th e Jets are filled w ith so lven t. U se the E m pty P a ck
an d So lven t P urge fu nction s to perform this step.

To prep are th e Jet P acks, you n eed to p erform th e follow in g step s:

1 Move the Printer Function Selector Switch to the Capper Down
position (see Figure 3-7).
2 Place the Capper Pad on top of the Capper and cover with a sheet of
polyethylene wrap.
3 Carefully fold and place VUTEk approved cloths (PN P9450-A) onto
the polyethylene wrap so that the entire surface is covered evenly.
4 Generously soak the cloths with VUTEk approved Head Cleaning
solvent.
5 Move the Printer Function Selector Switch to the Capper Up position.
6 This positions the Capper Plate under the Print Heads.
N o te: T h e p rinter w ill a utom a tically w eep ink (an d so lven t) th rou gh th e
P rint H ea d Jets w h en th e C arria ge is in the H om e positio n an d is
po w ered u p. T he C ap per w ill co llect ink as long a s th e C a pp er is u nd er
th e C a rriag e. W hile th e C a pp er rem ains u nder the C arria ge, the ink w ill
dra in in to the Wa ste Tan k.

O peration 3-9
 Recovering from Plugged Jets
S om etim e s the in k jets can b eco m e p lu g g e d w ith in k . W h en th is
prob lem o ccu rs it m ay be necessary to ap ply a sm all am ou nt of so lv ent
to the su rface of th e jets an d then co ver th em w ith po ly eth yle ne w rap for
a p e rio d u p to 1 6 h ou rs. T his sh o u ld o n ly b e d o n e w h en the p rinter is idle
fo r a pe rio d of tim e.
N o te: T he p rinter w ill run w ith u p to 1 5 to 20 jets m issing (no t
con secutive), w ith ou t a no ticeab le drop in prin t qu ality, w hen used in
th e E n ha nced and U ltra M od e.

A s a q u ick recovery for p lu gged jets, you can do th e follow ing:

1 Select Solvent Purge and press the appropriate color button for ten
seconds.
2 Select Ink Purge and press appropriate color button (one or two, one-
second bursts). Wipe the excess ink from the Print Heads.
3 To retest the Jets move the Printer Function Selector Switch to the
"Fire Jets" position.
4 Place a sheet of white paper under the Jet Packs and quickly depress
each color button to verify that the jets are firing correctly.
5 Select Test 1 and depress the Test Button. Print one line and press
the Test Button to stop. If jets are still not present, then repeat steps
1 thru 5.
W h en satisfied w ith the p erform ance o f th e Jet P acks, th e U ltraVu 3 36 0
P rinter is rea d y to b e p u t o n lin e.

3-10 C hapter 3
 Potential Hazards with Jet Packs

• Inks other than U ltraVu 3 m ay dam age the Jet Pack assem blies.
V U TE k recom m ends that only U ltraVu 3 ink be used w ith the
printer.
• It is im portant that Ink viscosity is w ithin specification; otherw ise
the jets m ay lose their prim e.
• To avoid ink flow blockage, replace the 8 um filters every three
m onths.
• D irt on the exterior of the jet can cause the droplets to scatter or
fire in the w rong direction. Flushing, purging and w iping can clear
this problem .
• D ried ink inside the jet orifice can cause a spiral effect, giving the
appearance of a zigzag line. To correct this problem , fill the jet
pack w ith solvent and place one or tw o w ipes on top of the C apper
P ad and soak w ith solvent. C over the C apper P ad w ith
polyethylene w rap before putting under the heads. S elect C apper
U p and leave for at least one hour (overnight, if possible) to
dissolve the blockage.
• A ny kind of m echanical dam age done to the surface of the jets w ill
cause problem s. Therefore, only use soft lint-free, V U TE k
approved cleanroom cloths for cleaning. You can purchase these
w ipes from V U TEk.
• A n air bubble in a Jet P ack w ill cause a Jet to lose the ink prim e.
If this occurs, purge the Jet P ack.

Using the Jet Pack Cleaning System

T his sectio n describ es the prop er insta llatio n and u se of the Jet P ack
C le aning S ystem . T h e sy stem is used to reco ver lost jets an d to prepare
th em for sh ip m ent to V U T E k.
N o te: A n y Jet P ack received by V U T E k th at h as no t been pro perly
clea ned w ill be in voiced at full price a nd w ill not be covered u nd er
w a rra nty.
Jet Pack Cleaning Station Parts List (P/N AA90159)

Quantity Description

1 Solvent Tank- includes pump

and Jet mounting plate

1 Power supply
1 Power cord

O peration 3-11
 Installing the Cleaning System Station

To in stall the C leaning Station, d o th e follow in g:

1 Connect the white power connector on the tank to the white power
connector on the power supply.
T he co n n e cto r is k ey ed .
2 Plug the power cord into the power supply.
N o te: T he p ow er su pply is desig ned for 95 to 25 0 VA C at 4 7 to 63 H z,
th is allow s fo r use an yw here in the w o rld. H o w ever, th ere a re different
style p lug s u sed aro un d the w o rld an d an ad ap ter m ay be req uired to fit
you r sp ecific ou tlet con fig ura tio n.
3 Remove the two plugs from the inlet hoses and cut the end at a 45-
degree angle and place in the bottom of the tank.
4 Clean and fill the tank with VUTEk Head Cleaning Fluid (Part Number
AA70075).
T his w ill req uire abo ut 2 ” (5 0 .8 m m ) o f H e ad C le an in g F lu id .
W A R N IN G : T h e u se o f a n y o th er so lven t w ill vo id yo u r w arran ty.

Jet Pack Cleaning Procedure

To clean a Jet P ack, follow these step s:

1 Select Empty Pack on the Printer Function Selector Switch and
depress the specific color button until no more ink is discharged
from the Jet Packs.
2 Select Solvent Purge on the Printer Function Selector Switch and
depress the color button for about 45 seconds or until the solvent
discharged from the Jet Packs runs clear.
3 Select Empty Pack on the Printer Function Selector Switch and
depress the specific color button until no more ink or solvent is
discharged from the Jet Packs.
4 Shut down the Workstation operating system and power down the
printer.
5 Remove the Jet Pack assembly from the Carriage Plate.
C a u tion : B efore rem oving o r insta lling Jet P acks th e follo w in g
precau tio ns m u st be o bserved :
• U se th e static stra p th at co nnects to the bo tto m o f the ca rriag e rail
bea m .
• A lw a ys w ear su rg ica l g lo ves (P art N u m b er P 3 083 -A ) w hen h and ling
th e Jet P acks.

3-12 C hapter 3
 • In sure tha t th e 12 0-Vo lt L E D o n th e Jet D river B o ard is exting uish ed.
6 Unplug the Cleaning Station and lift the cover.
7 Mount the Jet Pack into the station.
B e sure to p ositio n the u nit so tha t it m ou nts ex actly as it d oes to the
C arriage (larg e scre w on fa ce of Jet P ack to th e righ t – se e F igu re 3 -8 ).
T his align s the so lven t orifice to th e Jet P ac k orifice.
N o te: T he C lea nin g Station can b e u sed to clea n 1 or 2 Jet P a cks at a
tim e. If clean in g on e hea d, the u nu sed orifice w ill just p um p solvent into
th e tan k.

Filter

Large screw must be on

right for proper orientation

Jet Packs

Inlet Lines

Figure 3-8 Jet Pack Cleaning Station

8 Close the cover and plug in the Cleaning Station to begin flushing the
Jets.
9 Attempt to recover lost jets by flushing for a minimum of one hour.
T here is no m axim um tim e lim it fo r flush in g a Je t P ac k. M ost Jets th at
can b e reco v ered w ill b e rec o v e red a fte r 8 to 1 0 h o u rs o f flu sh in g.
10 When flushing is complete, shut off the power and remove the Jet
Pack from the Cleaner.
11 Install it back into the Printer and test for print quality.
If add ition al flush ing is req uired repe at step s 1 throu gh 11 .
C a u tion : K eep the C lea nin g S ta tio n co vered w hen no t in use to preven t
solvent co ntam ina tion

O peration 3-13
 Returning Jet Packs to VUTEk.

If flu shing th e Jets fails to m ak e the Jet P ack usable an d it m ust b e

retu rn ed to V U T E k , th e follow in g proced u re m u st b e follow ed:
1 Repeat steps 1 through 9 of the "Jet Pack Cleaning Procedure."
2 Flush the Jet Pack for 10 minutes.
3 Wrap the unit in bubble wrap or an equivalent packing material and
ship overnight to VUTEk.
4 Place the Jet Pack in one of the small polyethylene bags provided for
this purpose.

Maintaining the Cleaning Station

T he on ly m ain ten ance require d is ch ang in g the solven t and replacin g the
filters. S y stem m a intenan ce is dep end ent o n ho w clean th e so lv ent
re m ains. It is m ost a ffected by how m a ny Jet P ack s are clean ed, ho w
w ell th ey w e re flush ed in the p rinte r prio r to c lean ing and h as the solven t
b een p ro te cted from c o n tam in atio n . A s a g en eral g u id elin e ch ang e the
filters an d so lve nt e very three m on ths o r 2 5 c lean ing cyc les. F ilters m u st
be insta lled so th e arro w o n th em po ints in the d irection o f so lv ent flo w,
i.e. tow ard s the Jet P ack .
WARNING: Contaminated solvent will drastically reduce the
efficiency of the Cleaning Station and can even damage the Jet
Pack.

Using the M edia Hold Down Plate

T he M ed ia H old D ow n P late is desig ned to serve tw o pu rp oses. W h en
th e Va cuu m P laten C o ver is in p lace an d a va cuu m is ap plied , th e M ed ia
H o ld D ow n P late h old s the n on-m esh prin t m edia a gainst th e P laten .
W h en th e Va cuu m P laten C ov er is rem o ved a nd a vacu um is not ap plied ,
it serves as a collector for capturing excess in k w h en w orkin g w ith
m esh. T h e sections b elow describ e the u se o f each o f these fe atu res.

Working with the Vacuum Platen for Gripping Media

To assist in h old in g th e m aterial aga inst the printer ’s p laten, th e prin ter
is eq uip ped w ith a Vacuu m P laten (se e F igu re 3 -9 ). T h e Vacuu m P laten
con sists o f a p air o f g ro o v es that ru n alo ng the len gth o f the u p p e r
po rtion of the m ain P laten . A v acuu m g enerate d ben eath the P laten
draw s th e m e dia to its surface.

3-14 C hapter 3
Vacuum
Groove

Vacuum
Platen
Cover

Figure 3-9 Vacuum Platen

Vacuu m is c ontro lled th ro ugh the U ltraVu p ro gram . To a ccess the

prin ter ’s v acuu m settin gs, the u ser sim p ly sele cts S e tup from the m ain
m en u an d ch o o ses th e P rin ter S ettin g s o ptio n . T he S et P rinter
P aram eters w ind ow s ap pears (see F ig ure 3-10).

Figure 3-10 Set Printer Parameters Window

O peration 3-15
 T he va cuu m can b e selected to be alw ays on , alw ay s o ff, or o n on ly
w h en printin g o ccurs. A slid er c ontro l a llo w s the ope rator to adjust th e
lev el of vacu um desired .
N o te: T he u ser w ill n eed to experim ent w ith the Va cuu m L evel to
determ ine w h at is b est for his a pp lication . T he a m ou nt o f vacuum
need ed w ill dep end up on the type a nd w eight of m a teria l b eing printed
on .
T he a m o un t o f "va cuu m g ripp in g a rea " on th e surface of the P la ten can
be co ntrolled b y usin g th e tw o Vacu um S eal In serts (n ot sho w n ) th at a re
shipped w ith th e p rin ter. Sim p ly rem ove the Va cuu m P la ten C over as
described in th e "Workin g w ith the M esh C a vity for M esh M ateria l"
section a nd p la ce o ne o r b oth inserts a bo ut th e Va cuu m In let. P o sition
th e Va cuu m S eal Inserts a s desired alon g the M esh C a vity an d re-install
Va cuu m P la ten C over.
You sh ou ld a void usin g to o high a vacuu m level to p revent m edia fro m
being g ripp ed too tigh tly to th e P laten.

Working with the Mesh Cavity for Mesh Material

T he M ed ia H old D ow n can also be u sed for w orking w ith m esh . T h e
in ten t here is to u se the trou gh p ortion o f th e Va cuu m H old D ow n to
capture excess in k (se e F igure 3-11).

Vacuum
Inlet

Mesh Cavity

Platen

Figure 3-11 Platen with Mesh Cavity Exposed

3-16 C hapter 3
 To use the M esh C avity w h en p rintin g on m esh , d o th e follow ing:
1 Locate the Vacuum End Seals on each end of the Vacuum Platen.
2 As you lift one of the Vacuum End Seals, the Vacuum Platen Cover
will separate from the Platen.
3 Remove both Vacuum End Seals, the Vacuum Platen Cover, and any
Vacuum Seal Inserts from the Platen (see Figure 3-12).

Vacuum
Platen
Cover

Vacuum
End
Seals

Figure 3-12 Removing the Vacuum Platen Cover and

Vacuum End Seals

4 Apply a length of blotting material to the surface of the Mesh Cavity.

T his w ill be used to abso rb any ex cess ink that d rips fro m th e m e sh. It
also p rev ents ink from ente ring th e Vacuu m Inlet lo cated at th e m id-
po int of the M esh C avity.
5 Load mesh material onto the machine and print accordingly. When
mesh printing has finished, remove the blotting material and wipe up
any ink that spilled into the Mesh Cavity.
6 Install both Vacuum End Seals, the Vacuum Platen Cover, and any
Vacuum Seal Inserts (see Figure 3-13).

O peration 3-17
 Vacuum
Platen
Cover

Figure 3-13 Installing the Vacuum Platen Cover

Understanding the Printer Controls

Using the Internal Test Patterns

T he U ltraVu 33 60 D ig ita l P rin tin g S ystem co ntains six intern al test
fu n ctio ns tha t can b e u sed fo r testin g th e P rin ter a n d for se ttin g u p th e
P rinter fo r b e st p rint q u a lity. W hen u sed to g e ther, the Test B utto n and
th e P rin ter F u nction S electo r S w itch w ill ru n th e selecte d test p rint
pattern.

To activate any on e of th e Test F u n ction s, refer to F igu re 3-14 an d

p erform th e follow in g p rocedu re:
1 Rotate the Printer Function Selector Switch to one of the six test
settings (e.g. Test 1, Test 2, ..., Test 6).
2 Depress and release the Test Button on the Control Panel to initiate
a test pattern.
3 Depress the Test Button to terminate the test.

3-18 C hapter 3
T he te st se lected can b e c han ged an y tim e b y m ov ing the P rinter
F u n c tio n S electo r S w itc h to the d esired test n u m ber.

Figure 3-14 Control Panel

T he six tests are d escribed below :

Test 1
Test 1 fires all jets fo r all co lo rs. C o lo rs are sep arated by w hite sp ace in
order to v iew ind ividu al jet o utputs. T h e o utpu ts w ill app ear as a
vertical, in terleav ed solid co lo r bar, fo llo w ed by a sm all line seg m ent
prin ted fro m e very jet.

Test 2
Test 2 fires all jets in o rd er to print so lid , m ulti-co lor patterns. Ink d ots
are interleaved w ith no sp acin g at 1 00 % d ensity

Test 3
Test 3 is the B i-d irectiona l A lign m ent Test. It prin ts a vertical line of
do ts eve nly space d ap art, then steps the m aterial forw ard a nd rep eats th e
pattern in the o ppo site directio n. If th e do ts d o n ot appe ar d irectly o ver
on e another (v ertically alig ned ), the n the B i-D irection al A lig nm en t
P aram eter m ust be adjusted u sing U ltraVu S o ftw are S ettin gs M en u. T he
value can b e adjusted to w ith in 0 .0 00 1 ”. T he param ete r value m ust b e
set for all prin t speed s, i.e. Q u ality, S tand ard and M axim u m
N o te: To initia te a p rint speed ch an ge, the p rin ter m ust start printing an
im ag e in th e desired m od e. T he m od e can b e selected from the F 1 M en u.

O peration 3-19
 Test 4
Test 4 p rints a solid , 40 0% four-color (C M Y K ), b lac k pattern.T he te st
is u sefu l for exercisin g the jets a s w ell as che ck in g for jet d ro p o u t.
N o te: B e su re th at the in k dries b efo re it reach es the F ron t P inch R oller.
W hen th e R oller b ecom es con ta m in ated w ith in k, use o nly solvent o r P M
A ceta te to rem ove th e ink.

Test 5
Test 5 is th e S te p A djustm en t Test. It p rints a series o f ho rizon tal lin es,
step s the m aterial a nd p rints an oth er set. T he line seg m ents sho uld
app ear to b e o ne lin e (lin ed up ho rizon tally). T h e ho rizon tal distan ce is
con trolled throug h th e S tep S ize P aram e ter o n th e U ltra Vu S etup
S cree n. T h e value can b e a dju sted to w ith in 0.0 001 ”.

Test 6
Test 6 is a Jet P ack A lign m en t Test. It sho uld only be u sed by V U T E k
S erv ice E ng in eers.

Operating the Heater Controls

W h en on , the H e ater C on trol L C D disp lay s tw o n um bers: an u pp er
n u m b er an d a lo w er n u m b er. T he u p p er n u m b er d isplay s th e c u rren t
tem p erature of the he ater a nd th e lo w er n um b er sho w s th e target
tem p erature. W hen the P ow er B utton is turned O n, th e H eate r C o ntrol
L C D w ill briefly d isplay th e m a xim u m allow able tem perature b efore
re vertin g to the aforem entio ned co nd ition .
N o te: T he m axim u m allow ab le tem pera ture fo r th e P la ten P rehea ter
an d M edia D ryer h as been set at th e fa ctory a s follow s:
P laten P reh eater 158 º F 7 0º C
M edia D ryer 20 0º F 93 º C
B elow the n um be rs on th e L C D a re fou r b utton s. O ne is m a rk ed S et, th e
others are (↑), (↓) and (←) arro w s.

To ad ju st th e tem p eratu re on the app rop riate H eater C on troller,

refer to F igu re 3-15 an d follow the p roced ure below :
1 Depress the Set Button on the desired Heater Controller.
A ll nu m b ers w ill fla sh w ith th e selected nu m ber p ositio n high lig hted
(i.e . 00 85 ) allow in g fo r m od ificatio n.
2 Depress the (←) button as needed.

3-20 C hapter 3
 T he h ig h lig h ted n u m ber w ill m o v e o ne p o sitio n to th e left (i.e . 0 0 8 5 ),
allow in g m o d ificatio n to the ten s p o sitio n .
3 Depress the (↑) or (↓) button as needed.
T he high lig hted nu m ber w ill chan ge u p or d ow n, resp ectively. T h e
targ et tem p erature can be ad ju sted to any v alu e req uired for the p rint
m edia being used (i.e. 00 9 5 if th e ↑ is d epressed).D ep ress the S et B utton
to store v alu e.
T he lo w er nu m b er w ill now stop fla shin g, the ad ju sted tem p erature
setting w ill be sav ed, and the H ea ter C on trollers w ill retu rn to n orm al
o p era tio n .
C a u tion : T he H eater C o ntroller ’s tem pera ture (low er nu m b er o n th e
displa y) ca nn ot b e a djusted abo ve a set lim it of 2 00 º F (93 º C ) for th e
D ryer an d 15 8 °F (7 0 °C ) for the P rehea ter. T his m a xim um tem p eratu re
is set at the fa cto ry as a safety precau tio n.
N o te: D ifferent sub strates requ ire different tem p eratu re settin gs. We
reco m m end tha t you experim en t to find the b est setting s. S tart a t ro om
tem pera ture an d ad just the tem pera tu re up w ard in 10 ° in crem en ts.
Typical tem p eratu res ran ge from 1 30 °F - 180 °F (55 °C - 8 2 °C ) for th e
M edia D ryer a nd from O ff - 15 8 °F (O ff - 70 °C ) fo r the P reh eater. Too
high a tem p erature settin g o n eith er of the h eaters m a y ca use the m ed ia
to d rag o n th e h eater pla tes. T h is dra g w ill effect th e qua lity of the
printed im a ge.

O peration 3-21
 Actual Tem p Actual Tem p

D esired Tem p D esired Tem p

Set Set Set

Button

Actual Tem p

D esired Tem p

Set
.

Figure 3-15 Heater Controllers

3-22 C hapter 3
 Preheater Temperature and Image Control
V U T E k has set the P reh eater ’s u pp er tem p eratu re lim it to 158 SF
(7 0SC ). V U T E k re com m end s that y ou p rint w ith as low a P reheater
tem p erature as po ssible, below 15 8SF (70 SC ). If a fter p erform in g tests
on a m aterial yo u find th at y ou need to increase the tem peratu re ab ov e
15 8 SF (7 0 SC ) y ou sh ould be aw are tha t th ere are trade-offs in d oin g so.
T he P late n P rehea ter w as o rigin ally desig ned an d in stalled to w a rm the
m edia to a co nsta nt tem p erature, w hic h help s to crea te a m ore un iform
prin ted im a ge. It w as n ot intend ed to b e used as an ink d ry er.
S etting the P reh eater ’s tem pe rature too h ig h ten ds to w arp the P la ten
and cause it to bo w up w ard tow a rd s the P rint H eads. T his ch ange s the
distanc es b etw een th e P rin t H e ads and the m ateria l typ ically in th e
m idd le of th e p rinte r. T his in tu rn o ffsets the am ou nt of d ot gain in this
area of the print. W ith th e m aterial c loser to the print h eads, d ot gain is
decreased . T h is can result in som e areas in a prin t hav in g lo w er ink
den sities than oth er areas.
A d ditio nally, w ith th e P reh eater tem perature set hig h, the tem peratu re
am plifies the inco nsistencies ac ro ss the len gth of the P reh eater. A gain
th is ca n result in in k d ensity shifts across the im age, w hich w ill red uce
im ag e q uality.
A lso, w ith th e h ig her tem peratu re settin gs, the h eads te nd to gain heat
fro m the P rehe ater, in crea sin g th e lik elih o o d o f in k d ry in g an d clo g g in g
th e jets. To h elp red u ce th e lik elih o o d o f jet d ro p o u t, y o u sh o u ld p u rg e
th e jets perio dically.

Operating the Media Cooling Fans

T he U ltraVu 3 3 6 0 u ses a set o f fan s to c o o l the m ed ia b efore it le aves
th e p rinter. A sw itch located on the righ t-fron t sid e of the m achine is
availab le to turn th em o n an d off (see F igu re 3 -1 6).

O peration 3-23
 Fan Switch

Figure 3-16 Fan Switch Location

Understanding Print Speeds

The UltraVu 3360 Digital Printing System has three print speeds,
Quality, Standard and Max Speed.
Note: When changing printer speed, the Bi-directional Alignment Test
pattern may need to be run to verify settings.

Quality Speed
Quality Speed operates the Jet Packs at a controlled rate (20 in/sec
Carriage speed). This mode is used for high print quality applications.

Standard Speed
Standard Speed operates the Jet Packs at a moderate rate (40 in/sec
Carriage speed), minimizing the need for Print Head maintenance
during printing. A user can print a dense billboard without significant jet
drop out and without the need to interrupt the printing process to purge
or wipe the Jet Packs.

3-24 Chapter 3
Maximum Speed
M ax im um S peed o perate s the Jet P acks at an a dva nced rate (60 in/sec
C arriage spee d) that m ay requ ire p urg ing an d w iping d uring the prin tin g
proce ss to reg ain lost jets. W h en p rinting a t no rm al d ensities, care m u st
be ta ken to ensu re a qu ality p rint. S atelliting alo ng ed ges and lin es o f
con trast m ay occ ur at this sp eed.

Understanding Print Modes

T he U ltraVu 33 60 D ig ita l P rin tin g S ystem h as the cap abilities of
prin tin g in three op era tio nal m o des, U ltra, E nh anced and D raft.

Draft Mode
T his is a fa st, one -p ass m o de (18 0 d pi), in w hich the R IP is p ro gram m ed
to p rint ev ery oth er d ot h orizo nta lly. Vertic al reso lu tio n re m a ins th e
sam e.
A draw back to D raft M o de prin tin g is th at satu ra ted co lo rs are n ot as
vibrant as w ith the U ltra or E n han ced m od es. In ge neral th e U ltra Vu 3
in k s h av e a v ery stro n g colo r inte n sity, so this m od e m a y b e v e ry u sefu l
w h en h ig h th ro u g h p u ts are re q u ire d . To tak e ad v an tag e o f th is m o d e,
files m ust b e R IP pe d differently fro m that o f E nh ance d and U ltra
M o d es. T h is u su ally req uires adjusting the in k d e n sity setting s.

Enhanced Mode
In this tw o -p ass m o de, one jet prin ts half th e lin e (18 0 d pi), w hile
ano th er p rints the rem ainin g h alf. N o rm al R IP settin gs are use d w ith th is
m ode.

Ultra Mode
This mode uses four passes to print each line, providing the highest quality
print, but at the lowest printing throughput. N orm al R IP settin gs can b e
used for th is m o de.

O peration 3-25
 The Value of Multiple Print Modes

To av oid ban ding, th e U ltraVu 3 36 0 uses m ulti-pass m od es o f

o p era tio n in o rd er to tak e a d v a n ta g e o f a p ro cess called
in terleavin g. In a m ulti-pass m od e, th e prin t h ead m o ves acro ss th e
surfac e m o re th an o nce, bu t not all p ixels a re prin ted d urin g each
pass. In terleav in g--the process of filling in vario us po rtio ns of the
pixel g rid du ring eac h pass— h elps d isg u ise g litch es c au sed b y
m isfiring o r u n b a lan c ed p rin the ad s.
F or ex am ple, in a o ne-pa ss m od e, all th e noz zles on the prin th ead
are u sed ev ery tim e th e p rinthead m o ves across the m ed ia. If a
p articu lar jet h ap pens to b e o ut (d u e to im p ro p e r in k v isco sity, air in
th e jet, du st or o th er cau ses), the g litch w ill ap pea r in the sam e
lo cation o n th e m ed ia each tim e, crea tin g a visible b and .
In a tw o -p ass m o d e, o n e -h alf o f th e p ix els are p rinted d urin g the
first p ass w ith th e oth er h alf o f p ixe ls are p rinted du rin g th e secon d
pass. In a fou r-pass m od e, th e carriage trave ls back an d forth o ver
th e sam e area fo ur tim es, p rin ting on ly on e-fo urth of the pix els each
tim e. If a p articu lar printhead is firing at a slightly o ff an gle, a fou r-
pass m od e m ak es the p ro blem m uch less visible .
T he U ltraVu has th re e o perating m o des, each o f w h ich ca n be run
at eithe r qu ality, stan dard spee d or m a x speed . W hile high er sp eeds
can im p ro ve th ro ug hp ut, th e hig her stre ss o n the p rint h ead
in crea se s the likeliho od o f ex perien cin g m isfiring o r je t
m isalign m e nt.

Im proving Print Quality

T his sectio n disc usses so m e o f the fa cto rs th at can affect im ag e qu ality
and offe rs sug gestion s for im prov ing it.
A nu m ber o f facto rs can ad versely affect im ag e q uality. F or exam ple, if
a p rinthea d is p o sitio n e d too far fro m th e m ed ia, o v ersp ray c an o ccu r.
O v ersp ray ca uses im a ges to app ear fu zzy. S m earin g c an occu r if th e ink
isn ’t c om pletely dry befo re it is rolled u p on the Take-up R oll.

3-26 C hapter 3
 P rep ress errors, su ch as inad equ ate sc an resolution s or po orly balanced
colors, can a lso affect im ag e q uality. A no the r com m on problem is
ban ding, th at is, the ap pea ran ce of u nw anted strip es a cro ss the im ag e. It
is ty pic ally caused b y th e jets m isfirin g.
A ll of the p ro ble m s m ention ed ab ov e a re prev enta ble if op era tors are
th o ro u g h ly train ed in the ap p ro p riate o p era tio n and m a inten an ce
proce dures as w ell a s the c orrect cho ice o f print m ode s a nd m aterials for
certain app lica tio ns.
W ith a n ativ e re so lu tio n o f 3 6 0 d p i, the U ltraVu 3 3 6 0 o utpu ts in th re e
re so lu tio ns: 1 20 d pi, 18 0 dp i, and 3 60 d pi. W hile 360 dpi is m o re than
adeq uate fo r clo se vie w in g ap plication s, on m o st jo bs tha t req uire
distanc e vie w in g, it m ay no t be n ecessary. A t d ista nces greater than 20’
(6 .2 m ) a v ie w er w ill n ot able to d istin g u ish a 1 80 d p i im ag e fro m a 3 6 0
dp i on e. T h ere are m a ny tim es w hen it is m ore practical to print a t 18 0
dp i rath er than 36 0 d pi. F or ex am p le, a 3 60 dp i im ag e requ ire s a R IP file
size four tim es g reater than a 18 0 dp i im ag e. P rope rly con trollin g file
sizes can significantly im pact p ro cessin g tim e an d data storage
re quirem en ts.

Setting the Print G ap

T he P rint H ead m ust b e adjusted fo r m inim um print gap (w itho ut h ittin g
th e m edia) fo r im proving prin t q uality. V U T E k recom m end s a p rint gap
betw een 0.06 " - 0 .1 0" (1 .5 m m - 2 .5 m m ). R e fer to C h apter 5 ,
M ainte nan ce, for the p ro cedu re to adjust th e print gap .

Adjusting the Step Sizes

G en erally, th e S tep S ize sh o u ld b e set ac cordin g to the tab le sh o w n
below. T h e S tep S ize depe nds o n the prin t m od e and w h eth er it is a H ig h
S peed 4 -, 6- or 8 -ch ann el system .

Print Mode High Speed 4-Channel (in) 6- or 8-Channel (in)

U ltra 0.7 0.35

Enhanced 1.4 0.7

D raft 2.8 1.4

To verify th at th is settin g is accu rate

1 Run Printer Test 5.
Test 5 p rin ts a h o rizon tal lin e p a ttern fo r align m e n t o f the step fu n c tio n .

O peration 3-27
 2 Ensure the test pattern is “properly” aligned since this adjustment is
critical to print size.

To in crease im age prin t q uality

1 Increment the step size by 0.0002".
2 Print a critical portion of the image.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 as necessary to achieve the highest print
quality.

Working with the Preheater Settings

In g eneral, start w ith th e P reheater at room tem p erature. T his allo w s the
m ost d o t g a in an d u n ifo rm ity in th e so lid fill areas. Vin y l m aterial w ill
differ in receptiv ity to th e ink . F ollo w th e g uideline s b elo w to increase
im ag e q uality from th e p rinter.
• If th e ink run s o r d rip s, y ou sh ould either in crease the P re-hea ter
tem p erature o r ru n the im age throu gh prep ress p ro cess w ith le ss ink .
F our-color b lack s sh ou ld no t ex ceed 75 % (5 0% preferred) fo r each
of C M Y K colors.
• If w h ite lin e s ap p ear d u rin g d e n ser ink co v erag e (at 0 .3 " p itch in
E nh anced M od e), th en th is m ay in dic ate th at th e P rehe ater
tem p erature m a y need to be d ecreased.
• H o w m u ch hea t is requ ired? N o rm ally 10 0°F (38 °C ) w ill suffice fo r
m ost m ateria ls. V U T E k reco m m en ds startin g at roo m tem peratu re
and gradu ally increase th e tem perature in 10 °F ste ps un til an
o p tim u m p erfo rm an ce is ach iev ed - 1 50 °F (66 °C ) m ay b e req uired.
If th e tem p erature is set to h ig h, th e vin yl w ill ad here to th e P reh eater
re su lting in w hite lin es.
N o te: If the m ed ia d ot g ain is no t set high en ou gh, w h ite lines w ill
ap pea r o n th e im a ge. Vin yl th at is in con tact w ith th e P rehea ter w ill
ha ve a different d ot g ain from vinyl tha t is no t.

Working with the Media Dryer Settings

T he M ed ia D ry er sho uld be set for the lo w e st tem peratu re n eede d to
adeq uately d ry the im ag e. U sually, a tem p eratu re ra nge o f 13 0°F -1 80 °F
(5 5 °C – 8 2°C ) is rec om m end ed. A bo ve these tem p eratures, v iny l
m aterial m ay a d h e re to the M e d ia D ry er. B y lo w erin g th e d ry in g
tem p erature, th e ad hesio n of th e viny l to the P laten an d M edia D rye r is
re duc ed. A dh esio n is stron gest if th e v in yl h as rem ain ed static an d in
con tact w ith a hot M edia D ryer for som e tim e. V U T E k reco m m e nds th at

3-28 C hapter 3
y o u adv an ce the m aterial im m ed ia tely b efore b eg in n in g a n ew im a g e
prin t cy cle. T h is w ill h elp re duc e th e p ro ble m s of step erro rs c aused by
ov er h eating th e vinyl.

Adjusting the M edia Tension Settings

M ed ia tensio ning is acco m plished w ith a pn eum atic cylin der attache d to
th e fro nt serv om otor. In crea sing air p ressu re to the cylin der w ill in cre ase
ten sion , d ecreasin g air p re ssu re d ecreases tension. T he air pressure is
adjuste d w ith th e Ten sion A ir R egu lator in th e In k C o m p artm ent (see
F ig u re 3 -1 7). Ty p ical air p ressure settin g s for ten sion a re b e tw e en 1 0 to
40 p si (2 0 psi, n om in al).
N o te: To o high a p ressu re w ill cau se som e m aterials to stretch a nd
w rin kle.

Tension
Air
Regulator

Figure 3-17 Tension Air Regulator

T he co m b in atio n o f ten sion , m aterial, and tem peratu re settin gs affec t

ho w th e m aterial m ov es acro ss the P laten.To o hig h a tem p erature w ill
cause th e m a terial to stick to the P laten or the m aterial to slip in th e B ack
P inch R ollers. To o lo w a ten sion w ill preve nt th e m a terial fro m m o vin g
even ly o ver th e P la ten .

Managing Jet O utage

L iste d below are som e of the facto rs th at cau se a Jet to fa il to print.
• T he P rint H eads are in co nta ct w ith the m aterial.
• H igh P laten tem p eratures cause ink to dry on low u se Jets.
• L arge prin t ga ps cause ex cess ink to accu m u late o n th e Jet P acks.

O peration 3-29
 • S oiled o r c ontam in ated m a terial causes d ust to a ccum ulate o n the Jet
P acks.
• H igh ink v iscosity cau ses blo ckag es in Jet n ozzles.
• H igh Jet tem peratu res cau se ink to dry in Jet no zzles.

Conducting Trial Runs

U se a scale d do w n v ersion o f th e im age y ou p lan to print. P rocess th e
file throu gh th e C o lo rB u rst R IP S o ftw are a s yo u n orm a lly w o uld, ex cept
at a re duc ed size. O n ce the im a ge has be en ripp ed, print the file . F or
exam p le, a 2' x 6' (0 .6 m x 1.8 m ) sam ple can b e used fo r m o st trial ru ns.
C o lors w ill still m atch w he n scaled a nd p rinted on the sam e m ed ia.

Working with RIP File Resolutions

To im p ro v e the a p p e aran ce o f som e p rin ts, y o u m ay n eed to R IP p ro cess
th e files u sing a low er re so lu tio n setting . F or distance v iew ing , a1 20 d pi
re so lu tio n m ay b e m ore ap p ro p riate tha n a 3 6 0 d pi. reso lutio n. F or sm all
o r clo se-u p w o rk , a 3 6 0 d p i re so lu tio n m ay b e b est.

Setting the Carriage Height

W h en w o rk ing w ith m ed ia of d ifferen t thickn esse s it m ay be nece ssary
to adjust the C arriag e heigh t for prop er d ista nce b etw een the Jet H ea ds
and the m edia.

To ad ju st th e C arriage heigh t, d o the follow in g:

1 Press the E-Stop button to stop the machine and release the Carriage
from servo control.
2 Move the Carriage over the media.
3 Loosen the four corner bolts located at the back of the Carriage (see
Figure 3-18).
You w ill need a 7 /1 6" so cket or w ren ch to perfo rm th is step .

3-30 C hapter 3
 Corner Bolts (x2)

Corner Bolts (x2)

Figure 3-18 Carriage (rear view)

W h en settin g th e C arriag e H eigh t yo u w ill ne ed to raise o r lo w er the

C arriage in an in cre m en tal m an ner (see F ig ure 3-19).

Carriage

Jet Head
Face Plate

Media Platen

Figure 3-19 Carriage Height Adjustment (right side)

O peration 3-31
 4 Adjust the Left and Right Carriage Height Adjustment Knobs (see
Figure 3-20) so that each end of the Jet Head Face Plate is within
1/16" of the surface of the media. Adjust the knobs as needed to set
the gap for best printing results.

C arriage H eight Adjustm ent Knobs

Figure 3-20 Carriage (front view)

5 Tighten the four corner bolts.

6 Resume operating the printer.

Adjusting the Encoder W heel

To ac com m od ate th e u se of a w id er va rie ty o f sub stra tes the E n cod er
W h eel o n the U ltraVu 3 36 0 printers is d esign ed to be adjusted. T h is
adjustm en t allow s the op era tor to v ary the p ressu re th e enco der plac es
o n the d ifferen t su b strates in o rd e r to m in im ize slip p ag e o n flex ible o r
slip pery m ate rials. A djusting the E nco der W h eel in this m an ner
im prov es print quality on fabric s an d m esh m aterials as w ell.

To ad ju st th e E ncod er W heel ten sion, refer to F igu re 3-21 and

follow th ese step s:
1 Turn the Adjustment Knob located on the under side of the Encoder
Wheel Assembly clockwise to increase pressure or counter-
clockwise to decrease pressure.
2 Experiment with this setting to determine what works best for the
materials you may use.

3-32 C hapter 3
Encoder
Wheel
Adjustment
Knob

Figure 3-21 Adjusting the Encoder Wheel (rear view)

Com pensating for Horizontal Banding

H o rizon tal ban ding is the app earance of h orizo nta l line s in th e d irection
of carriag e travel that a re th e sam e w id th as a sing le pa ss (i.e. 3 /8 ” in
U ltra m o de an d 3/4 ” in E n han ced m od e). B an din g no rm ally sh ow s u p
in so lid colors w ith a low total in k percen tage (below 1 75 % ), espec ially
on v in yl m ate rials w ith lo w do t ga in.
H o rizon tal b and ing is usually the result o f inco rrect prin ter setup or the
d o t g ain o f the m aterial y o u are u sing . M aterials w ith lo w d o t g ain are
m ost likely to sh ow b and in g, b ecau se they a re m ore difficu lt to set up
p ro p erly. S o m e m aterials w ill p rin t p e rfectly w ith m in im al setu p an d
o th ers w ill req uire co n sid era b le setu p tim e.
H o rizon tal b a n d in g is m ost easily o v e rco m e b y p rintin g in U ltra m od e,
w h ich interlaces tw ice as m an y carriage p asses as E nh anc ed m ode .
P rinting in U ltra m o de w ill p ro du ce less outpu t th an E nh anced m o de,
bu t w ill requ ire less setup to ach iev e g oo d re su lts. F or d ifficu lt im ag es
and m aterials, setu p tim e ne eds to b e calcu lated as part of the total ru n
tim e fo r th e im a g e. It d o es n o t m a k e se n se to spen d a n h ou r o f setu p tim e
to sav e 30 m inu tes of print tim e. F or lon g prin t runs, th e add ition al setu p
tim e requ ired to print in E nh ance d m ode m ay b e justified .
To redu ce ban ding, yo u w ill n eed to perfo rm a nu m b er o f step s:
• C o rrect do t ga in to the m ed ia yo u are u sing .
• C le an ro llers w ith P M A cetate ( C A S #108-6 5-6 ) to in crease tack ine ss.
• Verify tha t all jets are firin g.

O peration 3-33
 • A d ju st pin ch pressure.
• C h eck and adjust th e ten sion ing m e chan ism s.
• R ed uce po st-heat tem peratu re to m inim ize stickin g.
• A d ju st the m ed ia vacu um .
• E nsu re th at th e w in der/u nw in der a ccessories are n ot creating drag.
• C alibrate the step size.
• A d ju st the b i-direction al align m ent.

Step 1: Correct for Dot Gain for the media

D o t g ain re fers to th e spreadin g o f a d ro p let o f in k as it co n ta cts th e
surfac e o f the m aterial. D ot g ain is a func tio n of ink , m aterial, and
tem p erature. If the do t gain is to o lo w, the in k rem a ins in discrete
drop lets after prin tin g, resu lting in a fad ed or w ash ed-ou t im ag e. M o st
prin t defects are exag gerate d by low d ot g ain . To o m uch dot gain causes
ru ns and dryin g prob lem s.

To ensu re su fficien t d ot gain :

1 Whenever possible, avoid using substrates with low dot gain.
L ow d ot g ain m aterials w ill sh ow b and ing m o re readily than h ig h do t
gain m aterials. W hen ever you are ex perien cin g ban ding p ro ble m s, try
using g ood -q uality m e dia w ith a rela tiv ely h ig h do t gain, su ch as L uck y
G o ld , S atu rn , o r M 2 b y M ey erc ord. M aterials w ith to o high a do t gain
can b e im prove d by increasin g th e pre-h eat tem p era ture. U nfortu nately,
lo w do t gain can on ly b e corrected b y red ucing the pre-h eat tem p eratu re
(see b elo w ).
2 Calibrate the RIP profile to the media you are using.
T he am ou nt o f in k la id do w n by th e prin t head s is d eterm in ed by the
profile applied d urin g th e R IP process. W h en yo u prin t an im ag e
prepa red w ith high d ot g ain p aram eters on a low d ot g ain m aterial,
in sufficien t in k can sh ow b and ing .
B ecau se the d ot g ain v aries am o ng m aterials, yo u need to calibrate the
R IP p ro file to the specific m a terial y ou are usin g. B y creating sev eral
R IP p ro files ran ging fro m low to high d ot g ain , yo u sho uld be able to
acco m m o date a w id e rang e of m aterials.
3 Reduce pre-heat temperature to increase dot gain.

3-34 C hapter 3
H ig h p re-h e at tem pe ratu res c au se in k to d ry q uick ly o n the m ed ia,
re d u c ing d ot g ain . To inc rease the d o t g ain o n a n y m ateria l, u se as low
a pre-h eat settin g as possible .
N o te: D o not use p re-hea t to a id in d rying th e in k. It is a d ot gain co ntro l
on ly.
If y o u con tin u e to exp erience h orizo n ta l b an din g , re-prin t th e
p ro b lem atic im age s in U ltra S ta n d a rd m o d e o r u se a h ig h d o t g ain
m aterial.

Step 2: Clean Rollers with PM Acetate

W h en th e p in ch rollers b ecom e d irtied w ith in k resid u e o r d ust, m ed ia
m ay slip as it fe eds th ro u g h the rollers. A s p art o f y o u r d aily p rinter
m ain ten a n ce, y o u sh o u ld c lean ink resid ue fro m th e ro lle rs u sin g P M
A ce tate ( C A S #1 08 -65 -6 ).
P M A cetate is recom m end ed for c lean ing the su rface of all rub ber
ro llers. P M A cetate dries ve ry q uic kly, le aving a slightly tacky su rface
w h ich assists in m ateria l han dling .
N o te: A lcoh ol a nd A ceton e a re n ot recom m en ded d ue to their capa city
fo r d rying ou t ru bb er rollers, p otentially sho rten ing the roller life a nd
lea vin g a slippery su rface.

To clean the rollers w ith PM A cetate (PM A ):

• C le an the rollers at the start of eac h sh ift (ev ery 8 hou rs of o peration )
and as n eeded (i.e. w h en in k ha s b een de posited o n th e ro llers).
• U se a clea n, c oarsely -textu re d clo th an d plenty of P M A .
• Tu rn the clo th frequ en tly to avo id d ep o sitin g d irt b ack o n to th e
ro llers.
• If nece ssary, w ipe dry w ith a clean, coarsely tex tured cloth .
• L eave a sligh tly tack y surface w hich w ill increase the g rip of the
pinch rollers.

Step 3: Verify That All Jets Are Firing

When jets become blocked with dried ink residue, some lines of
your image will not print, giving the appearance of bands across the
image. You can run test pattern 1 several times to evaluate the firing
patterns of the jet packs and determine how many jets are blocked.
If jets are blocked, purge and wipe the jets or soak them in solvent

O peration 3-35
 in order to clear the dried ink.
N o te: It is very im p orta nt to m ake su re th e jets are firin g p rop erly b efo re
ad dressing m ore com plex issu es related to h orizo nta l ba nd ing .

Step 4: Adjust Pinch Pressure

If the p in ch ro lle rs are n ot ap plyin g eno ug h pressure, m aterial w ill slip
as it feeds th ro ug h th e rolls, c reatin g un equ al distanc e b etw een ste ps.
S uch slipp ag e w ill sh o w b an d in g p ro b lem s o n an y p rin t. S lipp ag e can
usu ally b e elim in ated b y a dju stin g the pressure reg ula tor settin gs fo r the
pinch rolls.

To test for m aterial slip p age:

1 Attach a piece of masking tape to the roller, beside the material.
2 Mark the tape and the material at the same vertical position.
3 Allow the material to step.
4 Verify that the marks on the tape and material are still aligned.

To elim in ate m aterial slip p age on th e 3360:

1 Check that the regulator setting for the front pinch is between 50 and
70 psi and the back pinch is between 40 and 60 psi.
N o te: A 70 p si rea din g on the 60 p si ga uge is in dicated w h en the p oin ter
is straigh t do w n (6 o’clo ck po sition).
U n even pressu re ac ro ss th e pinch roller a llo w s part o f th e m aterial to
slip w h ile o ther parts re m a in in plac e.

To test for even p inch p ressu re:

1 Cut three (3) strips of the target media approximately 2 ft. (61 cm)
long and 1/4 in (6 mm) wide.
2 Open the pinch rollers.
3 Insert the strips of material between the pinch rollers:
4 One strip in the center of the roller; and
5 The others about 2 in (5 cm) from each end.
6 Close the pinch rollers.
7 Tug on each strip using a 10-15 lb. fish scale to ensure that pressure
is being applied evenly:
If the center strip can be pulled out more easily, decrease the pressure
on the front pinch regulator by 5 psi and try the test again.
If the strips on either end can be pulled out more easily, increase the
pressure on the front pinch regulator by 5 psi and try the test again.

3-36 C hapter 3
Step 5: Check Tensioning Mechanisms
O n ce yo u are c ertain that the m aterial is no t slipp ing , y ou ca n chec k th at
th e tension ing m ec hanism s are op eratin g corre ctly.
Verify th at the tensio n arm extend s fu lly w h en the tensio n is first turned
on , an d then m o ves in as th e m ateria l step s. If the tension arm do es no t
m o v e in, the m ate rial is p ro b ably slip p in g o n th e fro n t p in ch roller.
A d ju st the ten sio n arm p ressu re d e p en din g o n the w id th o f y o u r
m aterial. T h e reco m m e nde d ran ge is 2 0 p si fo r ev ery m eter o f m aterial
w idth ; for ex am ple, set the ten sio n arm pressure to 4 0 psi to prin t on 2
m eter m aterial.

Step 6: Reduce Post-heat Temperature

T he po st-heater is p ro vid ed to dry th e ink m o re rapidly than air d ry in g
alo ne. U n fo rtuna tely, h igh post-h eater tem pe ratures c an actu ally m elt
som e vinyl m aterials, causing them to stick to the p laten. W h enev er
such m ate rial has b een statio nary on a hot p ost-he ater for an y len gth o f
tim e it m a y w arp an d stretch , so y ou sho uld adv anc e to fresh m aterial
before prin tin g.
If yo ur m aterial is stickin g, th e d ista nce it trav els at eac h step w ill be
u n p redictab le, sh o w ing b an d s b etw ee n ca rriag e sw eeps. Yo u sh o u ld b e
able to elim in ate stickin g by red ucing the po st-heater te m p erature. In
such c ases, yo u can u se the IR heater to im prov e dryin g of th e ink .
N o te: S m oo th -b acked vinyl m aterials a re m ore likely to stick th an those
w ith a textu red su rface o n th e reverse side. If you a re u nab le to set the
po st-hea ter so tha t it still dries th e ink w ith ou t cau sing the m aterial to
stick, try u sing a m a teria l w ith a textu red b acking .

Step 7: Adjust Vacuum on the 3360

T he Vacu um system on y ou r 33 60 p rinter is p ro vid ed to red uce
w rin kling o f the m edia a s it passes ben eath the prin t he ads. If the
Vacuu m is set too h ig h, it w ill ca use th e m aterial to stick an d create
un even stepp in g.
T he Vacu um setting n eeds to be adjuste d fo r th e w idth of the m aterial
y o u are u sin g . W hen eve r y o u cha n g e m aterials, turn o ff the Vacu u m
in itially. If yo u exp erienc e w rin kling in the m ate rial, turn the Vac uum o n
and increase in 5 p si increm ents u ntil th e w rink lin g sto ps. In gen eral, the
Vacuu m settin g m ust b e fairly lo w fo r w id e , lig h tw e ig h t m aterials an d
h ig h e r fo r n arro w o r h eavy m a terials.

O peration 3-37
 Step 8: Ensure that Accessories are not Creating Drag
If th e ten sio n o n yo ur w ind er o r u nw in der accessorie s is set too hig h, th e
accesso ry w ill crea te a drag on the m ateria l tha t can create u neq ual
step s. D o no t u se the w in der and un w in der accesso ries to ap ply ten sio n
to the m edia.

Step 9: Calibrate the Step Size

Im p ro per step size w ill show horiz ontal ba nds be tw e en each ca rriag e
pass. W hen ever yo u c han ge su bstrates, run test pattern 5 and ad just th e
step size to m ake su re each pass is alig ned w ith th e nex t.
W h en th e m a terial is slipp in g or stick ing , it is diffic ult to ob tain an
accu rate step align m ent b ecause o f irre gular steps. Irreg ular step ping
w ill cau se Test P attern 5 to ap pear alig ned on so m e p asses an d m is-
align ed o n o th ers. In su ch cases, yo u w ill ne ed to v erify that the m aterial
han dling m ec han ism s are set up p roperly before calibratin g th e step
size.
A fter adjusting the step size to o btain accu rate alignm en t in test pattern
5 , y o u m a y w an t to fin e-tu n e the ad ju stm en t for the im a g e y o u are
prin tin g. B y m ou sing out a target a rea (particula rly in a solid area of
color) an d ex am inin g the p rin t for h o rizo ntal b a n d s, y o u m ay fin d th at a
slig ht o ffset from the “p erfect” step size y ields a b etter p rint.

Step 10: Adjust the Bidirectional Alignment

M isa lig nm ent betw een carria ge sw ee ps can sh ow h orizo ntal ban ds as a
re su lt o f break in g each v ertical lin e into segm en ts. Test pattern 3 is
prov ide d to ev alu ate th e carriage align m e nt be tw e en sw eep s.
T he carriage align m ent n eeds to b e set fo r each print sp eed. If yo u detect
a m is-alig nm ent in test p attern 3, y ou w ill need to ad ju st the
bidirection al align m ent settin g for the current p rint sp eed.
In m ax im u m spee d, the b idirec tio nal alig nm ent m ay need to be o ffset
slig htly du e to the satellite s gen era ted at hig h print speeds. Try view ing
th e v ertica l lin es of the test p attern from a few feet aw ay, adjusting the
bidirection al align m ent u ntil th ey ap pear as thin as p ossib le.

3-38 C hapter 3
 Chapter 4
UltraVu Software
••••••

Introduction
T his ch apter d escribes ho w to u se the U ltraVu C o ntro l P rog ra m .

Understanding the UltraVu Control Program

T he U ltraVu 33 60 D ig ita l P rin tin g S ystem u se s a w orkstatio n ru nn ing
th e U ltraVu P rinter C ontro l P ro gram (U ltraVu W orksta tio n) to co ntrol
th e p rinter an d to m an age th e files. T h e w o rk station is co nfig ured as a
W in d o w s N T w orkstatio n to p ro v ide a n e tw o rk con nection fo r p ee r to
peer file ha ndlin g. T h is con figu ration also allow s the o perato r to
org aniz e im ages and process files w h ile p rinting occu rs.
T he U ltraVu P rinte r C o ntrol P rog ram w ill p ro cess o nly RT L (R IP p ed)
file form a ts. T h ese file fo rm ats can be prin ted in th ree spe eds, Q ua lity,
S tand ard and M axim um S p eed. E ach spe ed can b e c onfig ured in three
different p rint m od es, U ltra, E n han ced an d H igh . T he U ltraVu S oftw a re
sup ports th e RT L file form a t.

U ltraVu S oftw are 4-1

 Starting the UltraVu Control Program
To start th e U ltraVu p rinter con trol softw are, dou ble click o n the U ltraVu
pro gram ico n on the W in dow s N T D esk top .

Understanding the UltraVu M enu Structure

T his section d escribes each of the fu nction s p erform ed by th e p ull-do w n
m en u s and the B utto n B ar ic o n s d isp lay e d o n th e m ain U ltraVu S cre en.
R efer to F igu re 4 -1 fo r th e U ltra Vu S o ftw are M ain M en u lay ou t. F igure
4-2 sho w s th e m en u ’s stru cture.

Figure 4-1 UltraVu Printer Control Program Menu

4-2 C hapter 4
 UltraVu Menu Structure

File
Open O pens file for printing
Log File
Recent File Shows last four files printed
Exit Exits UltraVu Software
Print
File Info Displays selected file inform ation size in bytes, resolution, etc.
Print O ptions

Print M odes Print M odes, Print Speeds, Segment Spacing, and Edge Detect
Settings

M edia Layout M edia width, margin settings, multiple roll setup

Units Selects inches or m etric display values within UltraVu

Im age Space Setting Sets white space above and below image during printing
.
Duplications Duplicates selected im age both vertically and horizontally.
O utput Resolution Specifies output resolution for the RTL files.
Select Area Im age and printer statistics. Prints specific area of im age.
Print Selected Area Prints selected area or com plete im age
View
S 1/16 Displays selected image 1/16 norm al size

S 1/8 Displays selected image 1/8 norm al size

S 1/4 Displays selected image 1/4 norm al size
1/2 Displays selected image 1/2 norm al size
Norm al Displays selected image norm al size (default)
2X Displays selected image 2 tim es size
4X Displays selected image 4 tim es size
Display Bitm ap If set on (default) when im age is opened, will display selected
im age.
Setup
Printer Settings Bi-Directional Adjustm ent, M edia Step Size, Save and Read
Default Functions as well.
Default Path Set up the default path for Im age files and Job files
Footer String Sets the information to printed in the footer.
Enter Password Password activates UltraVu Software
Channels
Change Channel Mode Selects between four and eight color operation
Help
Help Topics Lists Help Topics
About UltraVu Displays UltraVu and Firmware revision levels, free disk space,
and physical mem ory size (RAM )
Get Printer Rev Displays Firm ware Revision level
G et Media Stats Displays the print m edia settings

Figure 4-2 UltraVu Menu Structure

U ltraVu S oftw are 4-3

 Button Bar
B elow the com m an d m en u is a b u tto n b ar co n ta in in g sev en sho rtcu t
com m an d bu tto ns. T h e ico ns rep re se nt th e fo llo w ing co m m a nds (from
left to rig ht): O pen , P rint, A bo ut, H elp, D ry E nd , A dva nce, M ou se,
W ake, A u to S h ut, P rint Inf, an d O n line. S o m e o f these fu nctio ns m a y
also b e accessed u sing the p ull-d ow n m enu s. B elow is a d escription o f
th e fun ction s for the sh ortcut com m and too l bu tto ns.

O p en - T h e O pe n B utto n fu nctio ns the sam e as the

F ile - O pe n m e n u co m m an d .

P rint - T he P rin t B u tton perfo rm s the sam e fu nction

as the P rint S elected A rea com m and .

A bo ut - T he A bo ut B utto n func tio ns th e sam e as th e

H elp – A bou t U ltraVu com m an d. T his fu nction w ill
prov id e revisio n lev els of the firm w are and
softw are, as w ell as d isk an d m em ory param ete rs.

H elp – T h e H elp B utton fu nction s the sam e as the

H elp m enu .

D ry E nd - T h e D ry E n d B utton is n ot sup po rted on

th e p ull-do w n m en u. W hen selected, the D ry E n d
fu nctio n w ill au tom atically ad van ce the m ed ia
m aterial un til th e end of th e prin ted im age is on th e
M ed ia D ry er. T h e m aterial w ill a dvan ce at th e sam e
m aterial feed rate that the im ag e is p rinted at.

Wa ke – T his b u tto n w ak es u p the sy stem .

4-4 C hapter 4
A dva nce - T h e A d van ce B utton is not su pp orted b y
a pu ll do w n m en u co m m an d. S electing this b utton
w ill ad van ce th e m ed ia m ateria l app ro xim ately 2 .5”
(6 .3 5 cm ). T he A dv an ce b utto n o n th e p rinter
C o ntrol P an el also initia tes this fun ction .

M ou se – T he M o use B utto n is used in con ju nction

w ith th e P rint S elected A rea co m m a nd. It allow s the
op era tor to select a po rtion o f an im age to print
using th e P rin t S elected A rea co m m an d.

A utoSh ut – T he A u to S h ut B u tton au to m a tically

shu ts dow n th e system .

P rin t Inf – T his butto n d eterm in es w h eth er a foo ter

is or is not printed alo ng the b ottom of the im ag e.

O n L ine – T h is bu tton pu ts th e p rin ter o n- or offline.

U ltraVu S oftw are 4-5

 File Menu
To acce ss th e F ile M enu , select F ile o n the m enu b ar. R efer to F igu re 4-
3 for the F ile M enu w ith F ile O pen W indo w. T he co m m an d structure fo r
th e F ile M en u is as fo llo w s:

File

Open O pens a specific file for printing

Log File Activates / deactivates the logging of

printer events (e.g., errors, start tim e,
stop tim e, etc.)

Recent File Show s last four files opened

Exit Exits U ltraVu S oftw are

Figure 4-3 File Menu with File Open Window

Print Menu
To a ccess the P rint M en u, se lect P rint on the m enu bar. R efer to F igure
4-4 for the P rint P ull-D o w n M enu .

4-6 C hapter 4
 Figure 4-4 Print Pull-Down Menu

T he co m m an d structure is as follow s:
Print
File Info D isplays selected file inform ation (e.g
. size in bytes, resolution)

Print O ptions D isplays P rint M ode, M edia Layout,

Borders, U nits of m easurem ent O ptions

P rint M odes Print M odes, Print S peeds, and S egm ent

Spacing settings

M edia Layout M edia w idth, m argin settings, m ultiple roll

setup

U nits Selects Inches or m etric display values

w ithin U ltraVu

Im age S pace
S etting S ets w hite space above and below im age

Duplications D uplicate selected im age both vertically

and horizontally
O utput Resolution Specifies output resolution for RTL files

Select A rea Im age and printer statistics. Selects

specific area of im age

Print S elected A rea Prints S elected Area of im age or

com plete im age

U ltraVu S oftw are 4-7

 File Info disp lay s the attribu tes of the sele cted file. F ile inform ation
display ed inclu des Im a ge S ize (in pixels), Im ag e D im en sion s (he igh t
and w id th ), Im ag e R esolution , P asses to P rint F ile, Im age S ize (in
by tes), an d C olor M od e (see F ig ure 4 -5 )l.

Figure 4-5 File Information Screen

Print O ptions allo w s yo u to ch oo se from P rin t M o des, M edia L a you t,

U n its, or Im age S pa ce S etting.
T he P rint M ode s S creen (see F igure 4-6) is used to select the p rin t
speed : Q u ality, S tand ard or M axim um a nd a ch oice o f prin t m od es:
H ig h , E nh an ce d , o r U ltra.
W h en ch ecked , the D o ub le S trike O ption B ox en ables the p rinter to
p rin t b a cklig h t d isplay s. D o u b le strik in g is arch ive d b y step p in g h alf as
m uch as no rm ally ad van ced . To tal ink co verage ex ceed s 3 20 % . In
p repa rin g for this ty p e o f p rin tin g , h ig h e r th an n o rm al c o n tra st a s w ell
as low er tota l ink percentages m ust b e used w hen the file is create d.

4-8 C hapter 4
A u to S hu td ow n w ill allow the p rinte r to fin ish a prin ting job b efo re
autom atically shu tting d ow n th e sy stem . It instructs the prin ter to
adv ance th e m edia p ast the far ed ge o f the dryer at th e en d o f th e prin ted
file.
F inally the am o un t o f ed ge o verlap can b e set. T he E dge O ve rlap S etting
is u sed w hen p rinting m ore th an one segm en t in an im ag e w ider than th e
m edia load ed on to the prin ter.
N o te: S in ce there is a 3.2-m eter lim it, th e edg e overla p allo w s the
op erator to repea t a p ortion of th e right ed ge of th e previo us segm ent on
th e left edge o f th e cu rren t segm ent.

Figure 4-6 Print Mode Screen

T he M edia L ay ou t S creen (see F ig ure 4 -7 ) enab les the o perato r to select

th e roll’s w id th dim ensio n as w ell as the am o unt of left m arg in, righ t
m argin , an d m edia w id th for up to tw o ro lls o f m edia load ed o nto the
prin ter.

U ltraVu S oftw are 4-9

 Figure 4-7 Media Layout Screen

T he U n its S creen (see F igu re 4-8) allow s for sele ctio n of U S o r M etric
d im e n sio n s to b e u sed d urin g p rintin g o f the sele cted im a g e.

Figure 4-8 Units Screen

T he Im a ge S pace S etting S creen (see F igu re 4 -9 ) is use d to set the

am ou nt o f w h ite sp ace abo ve an d below im a ge.

4-10 C hapter 4
 Figure 4-9 Image Space Setting Screen

Duplications allow s for th e d up lic atio n of selected im ag es b oth

vertically and horiz ontally, en ablin g th e u ser to prin t m ultip le im ag es o n
th e m ed ia. T he nu m ber o f d up licate im age s p rinted and the ho rizon tal
space b etw een each im age can a lso be set h ere (see F igu re 4 -1 0).

Figure 4-10 Duplications Screen

U ltraVu S oftw are 4-11

 Output Resolution specifies ou tpu t resolu tio n for eith er RT L files or C T files
(see F igu re 4-11 ) . T he U ltraVu 3 3 6 0 ca n b e o p erated at 1 2 0 , 1 8 0 , o r 3 6 0
dp i w h en RT L files are used o r it can be o perated at 18 .7 5 or 36 .5 d pi
w h en C T files are to b e p rinted. T h is op tion, ov errid es any p rint
re so lu tio n lo aded w ith th e file.

4-11 Output Resolutions Screen

Select Area serves tw o pu rp oses: 1 ) it d isp lay s cu rrent im age / p rinter

statistics, and 2) it allow s the op erator to spe cify w hat area of an im ag e
to p rint. S om e of the sta tistics show n are im age resolution , nu m ber of
ro lls installed a nd o verall im a ge dim e nsio ns (w id th an d len gth). T he
user can set th e U se M o used A rea S ettin g (see F ig ure 4-12 ) on ce a
po rtion o f the im ag e h as b een outlined w ith th e cu rso r. T h e area outlined
by the m ou se b ox w ill be prin ted . D im ension s o f th e outlined area are
display ed o n th is sc reen .

4-12 C hapter 4
 Figure 4-12 Select Printing Areas Screen

Print disp lay s th e p rint pa ram eters fo r th e selected im a ge and in itiate s

im ag e p rinting . It is im po rtant to check these p aram eters before prin tin g
(see F ig ure 4-13 ).

Figure 4-13 Print Parameters Selected Screen

U ltraVu S oftw are 4-13

 View Menu
To access the View M enu (see F ig ure 4-14 ), se lective from the U ltraVu
M en u B ar.

Figure 4-14 View Pull Down Menu

T he View M enu stru ctu re is as follow s:

View

S 1/16 D isplays im age 1/16 x norm al size

S 1/8 D isplays im age 1/8 x norm al size

S 1/4 D isplays im age 1/4 x norm al size

1/2 D isplays im age 1/2 x norm al size

Norm al D isplays im age 1 x norm al size (default)

2x D isplays im age 2 x norm al size

4x D isplays im age 4 x norm al size

D isplay B itm ap W hen set and im age file is open, it w ill

display select im age defined by view size
above.

4-14 C hapter 4
Setup Menu
T he S etup m en u allo w s the use r to defin e the prin ter settin gs, sele ct the
file de fau lt p ath, and upd ate the firm w are (see F igu re 4 -1 5. T h e E nte r
P assw ord o ption is u sed to initially ac tiv ate th e U ltraVu 336 0 prin ter.

Figure 4-15 Setup Pull-Down Menu

T he co m m an d structure is as follow s:

Setup

Printer Settings Bi-D irectional A djustm ent, M edia

Step S ize, and M axim um M edia
Accuracy settings

Default P ath Specify default path for Im age and

Job Files

Footer S tring O pens the Job D ata W indow. This

w indow specifies inform ation to be
printed along bottom edge of m edia
(e.g. C ustom er N am e, D escription,
M aterial and Job N um ber).

Enter Passw ord U ltraVU hardw are key (dongle)

passw ord. P roper passw ord m ust be
entered to activate printer and
U ltraVu softw are.

U ltraVu S oftw are 4-15

 Printer Settings T h is op tio n op ens th e S et P rin ter P aram eters W ind ow
(see F ig ure 4 -1 6 ). T his w in d o w d isplay s th e p rinter ty p e - V 3 3 6 0 ,
P rinter Vacuu m S ettin gs, B i-directio nal A dju stm en t S ettings for the
th ree p rint spe eds and M edia S tep S ize A m o un t. M axim u m M edia
A cc uracy and U se F eed E nco der C he ck B ox es are also on this w ind ow.
To establish settin gs, p ress th e ’S av e C urren t A s D e fau lt’ bu tto n.
N o te: R em em b er no t to d o th is if no para m eters a re listed . T his w ill
erase all current settings an d repla ce them w ith zero s. To co rrect this
situ ation , p ress R ead D efa ult Settin gs. If there still is a problem , exit
U ltraVu , reset th e p rin ter, an d re-rea d th e default settin gs.

Figure 4-16 Set Printer Parameters Window

P rinter Vacuu m S ettin gs are u sed to c ontro l th e am o un t of vacu um

need ed to ho ld do w n th e m edia as it e xits th e m ach ine . T he v acuu m ho ld
do w n features h elp s to m inim ize m edia w rink lin g.
M ax im um M ed ia A ccuracy is used to w hen m axim u m im age q uality is
desired . T h is se tting w ill inc rease p rint tim e in m ost cases.
U se F eedb ack E nc oder is used to en able the prin ter ’s closed -loop m ed ia
tracking feature. T h is allo w s for the precise m o vem ent of the m aterial
th ro ugh the m ach in e.

4-16 C hapter 4
T he M edia S tep S ize is u sed to calibrate the precise ad van cem ent of th e
m edia. T his v alu e typ ica lly increm ents (or decrem ents) in 0.00 01 ”
(0 .0 2 5 m m ) steps d ep en d ing o n th e a lig n m en t o n th e im age. A d ark lin e
at th e top of a b and o f prin t m ay in dicate th at th e ov erlap is to o sm all
and the step siz e sh o u ld b e in crea sed b y 0 .0 0 0 1 ” (0 .0 02 5 m m ). If a lig ht
or a w hite lin e a ppe ars, the step size is too g reat a nd ha s to be decreased .
T he op erato r sho uld start at th e d efault value and adju st th e step size
based upo n th e abo ve criteria .
B i-D irectio nal A djustm en t Q u ality allo w s yo u to ad ju st the v ertical
align m en t of th e p rint d ots w hen o perating at Q ua lity speed . T h is
adjustm en t is m a de w hen usin g Test P attern 3 . S im ilar adjustm en ts can
be m ade w hen o perating the p rinter at S tan dard and M axim um sp eed s
N o te: A lw ays record you r d efa ult setting s b efo re cha ng ing any
pa ram eters on this screen.
Default Path T his o ption o pen s the D efau lt P ath s W ind ow (see F igu re
4-17 ). T hrou gh this w ind ow the user selects the defau lt im ag e and job
file d irec to ry p ath s.

Figure 4-17 Defaults Path Window

Footer String T his o ptio n o pen s th e Jo b D ata W in d o w (se e F ig ure 4 -1 8)

U ltraVu S oftw are 4-17

 Figure 4-18 Job Data Window

Enter Password F or the p urpo se o f k eeping o ur custo m ers cu rrent w ith

th eir p rinter pa ym ents, V U T E k h as installed a p assw o rd secu rity
syste m . A curre n t K e y and C o d e co m b in atio n is g iv en to the o w n er u p o n
re ceip t of p aym en t. T h is K e y and C ode are th en entered th ro ug h the
P assw ord E n try W ind ow (see F igu re 4 -1 9) to activate the p rinte r.

Figure 4-19 Password Entry Window

4-18 C hapter 4
Channels Menu

T he C han nels P ull-D o w n M enu (see F igure 4 -2 0) p rovides acce ss to th e

C h ang e C han n el M o d e O ptio n .

Figure 4-20 Channels Pull-Down Menu

T he C h ann els M en u structure is a s follow s:

C hannels

C hange C hannel M ode

Change Channel M ode T his o ption o pen s the E ig ht C olor / F o ur C olo r

M o d e W in d o w (see F ig u re 4 -2 1). F ro m this w in d o w the o perato r can
select the n um ber of c olo rs to use w ith th e system : 4 - or 8-C o lor.

Figure 4-21 Eight Color / Four Color Mode Window

Help Menu
T he H elp P ull-D o w n M enu (see F igu re 4 -2 2) p ro vides access to the
H elp To pics, A b ou t U ltraVu, G et P rinter R ev, an d G et M edia S tats
S cree ns.

U ltraVu S oftw are 4-19

 Figure 4-22 Help Pull-Down Menu

T he H elp M e nu struc ture is as fo llo w s:

Help

Help Topics

About U ltraVu

Get P rinter R ev

G et M edia Stats

Help Topics T his o ption is n ot av ailable a t this tim e.

About UltraVu T his o ptio n op ens th e A bo ut U ltraVu b y V U T E k
W ind ow (see F igure 4-23 ). It display s the S o ftw are B uild an d F irm w are
R ev isio n. T he M em ory S ize an d D isk S pace F re e P aram eters are also
display ed in this w in do w.

4-20 C hapter 4
 Figure 4-23 About UltraVu by VUTEk Window

Get Printer Rev T h is o ption o pen s th e P rin ter F irm w are R evision L e vel
W in d o w (see F ig u re 4 -2 4) a n d d isplay s th e c u rren t V U T E k F irm w are
R ev isio n.

Figure 4-24 Printer Firmware Revision Level Window

Get M edia Stats T his op tion d isplays th e M aterial U sage W in dow (see
F igu re 4 -2 5). It is used to m on ito r m ateria l usag e an d m ach ine tim e.

U ltraVu S oftw are 4-21

 Figure 4-25 Material Usage Window

4-22 C hapter 4
 Chapter 5
RIP Station
••••••

Overview
T his ch apter is in ten ded to fam iliarize yo u w ith th e capa bilities of
C o lorB u rst R IP (R a ster Im age P ro cessin g) S oftw are. T h e C olorB urst
R IP S oftw a re read s p rep are d R G B and C M Y K file s and tran slate s th em
in to a file form at (RT L ) that the U L traVu S oftw are c an proce ss.
C o lorB u rst typically runs on a sep arate w o rk station apart fro m th at of
th e U ltraVu w orkstatio n.
N o te: T he C olo rB urst D ong le m ust be a tta ched to the R IP in ord er for
th e C olorB urst S oftw are to w o rk.

Postscript Files
C o lorB u rst can o n ly p ro c ess P ostscrip t file s. T he P ostsc rip t file m od e
sup ports th e fo llo w ing featu res:
- A ccepts P ostscript L evel 3 files
- T IF F 6.0 o r T IF F -IT ra ster files
- 3 60d pi text (or selected resolu tion)
- A ccepts Typ e 1 ,3,4 and TrueTyp e fon ts
- Ty pe O fon ts (C hin ese, Jap ane se , A rab ic, and o th ers.)
- C o lo r correction at P repress or R IP
- R e so lu tio ns of 360 , 1 80 , an d 12 0 dp i
- P re se t “plug an d play ” calibratio n an d lin e arizatio n
- P ho to S h op C M Y K S ep aratio n Tab les
- S W O P – U ltraVu L ineariza tio n as D efault
- IC C P ro file for S W O P & U ltraVu
- IC C P ro file Tw eeke r

R IP S tation 5-1
 Understanding the Postscript File Form at
P ostS crip t is a p rintin g so ftw are lan gu ag e d ev elo p e d b y A do be fo r
desk top p ub lish in g. It’s a m ean s o f com b ining te xt and im a ge data in a
sin gle lay out. O n e of the fun ction s of a R IP is to con vert im age files in to
a P o stS cript files, send them to the prin ter and o utp ut the graph ics files
so bo th the im ag es an d th e tex t are sh arp .

Vutek PostScript Format Highlights

Resolutions: 120, 180, 360, and 720 (Apparent) pixels per inch (ppi)
360 dpi text or selected resolution
Accepts Type 1 and True Type fonts (PostScript Level II)
Type 0 fonts (Chinese, Japanese, Arabic, etc…)
Color correction during process or with ColorBurst RIP
Preset plug and play calibration
PhotoShop CMYK separation tables
PhotoShop - UltraVu Linearization

5-2 C hapter 5
 Raster Image Processor
R IP s h a v e sev eral fun ctio n s. B asic ally, a P ostS crip t R IP u ses
com p lex m athem atical form u las to con vert th e c urved sh apes of
im ag es an d tex t in to the “rasters” (lines) used in digital prin tin g.
In traditio nal o ffset p rinting , the con versio n of a co ntinu ou s-tone
im ag e to lines is do ne w ith line screen s---w hich break the im ag e
do w n into a g rid of fixed sp aces w h ich are filled in w ith vario us
lev els of ink (p ixel points). W ith a P ostS crip t R IP an d digital
prin tin g, the do ts o f in ks d on ’t h ave to be placed w ith in a fix ed grid
of pix el po in ts. Instead, th e R IP offers a selectio n of “ sc reen in g
patterns” such as stoch astic an d erro r-diffusion . T he screen ing
p attern ch o sen for a p articu lar job w ill d ep en d o n th e typ e o f
graph ic be ing created. A sig n w ith a lo t of tex t and sh arp edg es
m igh t requ ire a sto cha stic screening p attern , w hereas a
p h o to grap h ic im ag e w ith b lend s a n d sh adin g s in the b a ckg ro u n d
m ig h t b en e fit fro m an e rror-d iffu sio n screen in g p atte rn th at m ak es
defects in solids less no tic eable.
In larg e-form at d igital prin tin g, th e R IP a lso “interp ola tes” im ag e
data d uring en larg em ent. T h is m ea ns it ad ds data w hen nec essa ry
to k eep jagg ed (p ix elated) e dge s fro m ap pea rin g w hen a bitm ap
im ag e is en larg ed.
R IP s are also u sed to con trol in k den sities so th e d esired colo rs can
b e cre ated o n v a rio u s typ es o f m ed ia. F o r e x am p le, w h en a d o t o f
in k h its fab ric o r can v as, it sp read s d iffere n tly th an it w ou ld o n
v in y l. W hen d ata abo ut in k and m ed ia h av e b e en fed into the R IP,
th e so ftw are can m ak e the ap propria te adjustm en ts. IC C co lo r-
m anag em ent too ls in th e R IP can also help m ake su re th at th e
colors p ro du ced on the p rinte r clo sely resem ble the scan ned im age
yo u saw displayed o n yo ur m o nitor.
O ther fu nction s p erform ed b y R IP s in clu de con verting inco m ing
files into P ostS crip t, arran ging m u ltiple prin ts ac ro ss the w id th of
th e m ed ia to m inim ize w asting m aterials, and m an aging the
sequ ence in w h ich job s w ill b e prin ted.

R IP S tation 5-3
Dot G ain and RIP Color Correction
T he pu rp ose o f th is doc um ent is to cla rify the prop er co lo r correction
du e to dot gain w hile prin ting w ith a Vutek ink jet p rinter u sing ou r R IP
softw are, C o lo rB u rst. B eing able to p red ict h o w files w ill p ro p e rly p rin t
on sp ecific m ed ia h as lon g b een the g oal o f m o st of ou r cu stom ers. T h is
R IP softw are an d th e follo w in g p ro ce sses w ill h elp y o u g e t clo ser to th at
go al.

Understanding Dot Gain

F irst tho ug h, let’s g o ov er w hat ca uses m o st color to ch ang e w hen
prin tin g oc curs -D o t G ain. T he lea din g cau se o f in correct color is dot
gain on sp ecific m ed ia. A ltho ugh each m edia yo u print on h as a
particular ability to increase th e look of the p rinted d ot, d ot gain ca n b e
determ ined an d co ntrolled to im p ro ve color.
W h en a certain size ink d ot is sp ecifie d fo r a p articu lar m ed ia type , an d
th at actu al in k do t size o n th e m ed ia is larg er than the do t orig ina lly
specified, th e en d result is k no w n as do t g ain (see F igu re 5 -1 ). A sim ple
exp lan ation is that the do t ten ds to sp read out o n th e m edia d urin g the
drying p ro cess b ecau se o f in k an d m edia ch aracteristics. T h is is
“m echa n ica l” do t gain. A n o ptical illu sion that m ak es the d ot ap pear
larg er th an its a ctu al size is kn ow n as “op tica l” do t gain. T h e actu al
characteristic s that affect ho w m uch dot gain w ill oc cur a re m ore
com p lex . T he follow in g illustratio n show s how dot gain con trol h elps
keep correc t color.

Figure 5-1 Dot Gain

Ink Characteristics That Affect Dot Gain

• Tack a nd Visco sity – H ig her tack an d v isc o sity w ill p ro d u ce less d o t
gain
• In k/C arrier B alance – T h e balance b etw e en th e ink a nd carrier
(so lv ent) w ill affect tac k and v isco sity
• P igm en t S trength – T h e stren gth of the p igm en t affe cts optical dot
gain. H ig her streng th, m ore g ain

5-4 C hapter 5
• Tem pe rature – T he tem p erature w ill affect ho w fast th e ink d ries. A
h ig h e r tem p eratu re w ill result in le ss d o t g a in
• In k F ilm T h ickn ess (P rin t D en sity ) – T h e p rint den sity affects o ptical
do t gain.

Media Characteristics That Affect Dot Gain

• B righ tn ess, W hiteness an d O p acity – T his affects o ptical do t ga in
• P orosity / H o ld out – T he m ore porou s the m ed ia, the h igh er the do t
gain
• S m o oth n e ss – T h e m o re sm oo th er th e m ed ia, th e less d ot g ain
• Ten sion – Ten sion w ill affec t sm o othne ss

Printer Characteristics and Settings That Affect Dot Gain

• M ed ia S peed – M edia p ro du ction (throu gh pu t) sp eed w ill affect ho w
fa st the ink d rie s
• P rint H ead S peed – C arriage ve locity ca n adv ersely affect do t gain
• P re/P o st H eat S ettin gs – H igh p re h eat can d ecrea se d ot g ain… up to
a po int
• In k C o v erag e – O ver satu ration of tota l ink % can in crease dot g ain
• A m b ient Tem peratu re – H ig h am bient thin ink visco sity, in creasin g
do t gain
To h elp illu strate h ow d iffe ren t m edias h and le do t gain, loo k at the
fo llow ing illustration o f prin ted pressu re sen sitive viny l com p ared to
re inforced v in yl an d pap er (see F igu re 5-2).

Figure 5-2 Dot Gain on Different Media

A s yo u can see fro m the illustratio n, there is a great de al of differe nce

betw een m e dia su rfaces. N ow that w e hav e cov ered dot gain , w e w ill
m o v e o nto R IP co lo r corre ctio n . F in d in g the color b a lan ce o f y o u r file s
com in g fro m p rep re ss is th e first ste p to g ain ing an u n d erstan din g o f
w h y co lor isn’t c orrect on d ifferen t m edia. F or m ore inform ation ab ou t
calibration of ind iv idu al m aterial on a Vutek printer, see the C o lorB u rst
C o lor C alibration sectio n later in this ch apter o r V S B 1 71.

R IP S tation 5-5
 GCR, UCR, Maximum Black and Neutral Balance
G C R (G ray C om po nen t R ep lacem en t) is u sed to red uce th e total
am o u n t o f in k in d ark colors as w e ll as d ark n e u tral sha d o w s. G C R
w o rk s b y rep la cin g the ‘gray co m pon ent’ of a color w ith the p ro per
am o u n t o f b lack w h ile m ain tain in g the sam e d en sity an d h u e (see F ig u re
5 -3 ).

Figure 5-3 Gray Component Replacement

U C R (U nd er C o lo r R em o val) is used to red uce th e total am ou nt of dark

neu tral areas o f an im ag e. U C R d oes this b y rem ov in g po rtio ns of cy an,
m agen ta, and y ellow ink in neu tral gray sh adow s and replacin g th e
colored in k w ith b lack ink . T h is m a kes the sh ado w th e sam e co lor and
den sity but red uces th e total am ou nt o f in k used . U C R is on ly d on e to
th e n eutra l sh ado w s in an im ag e (see F igu re 5 -4 ).

Figure 5-4 Under Color Removal

M axim um B lack is the to tal am ou nt of b lack typically sp ecifie d b y the

press op erato r. T he ran ge is u su ally from 7 0% to 9 5% m ax im um b lac k.
T his w ill affect h ow m u ch U C R or G C R is ap plied to th e d ark neu tral
shad ow s.

5-6 C hapter 5
N eu tral B alan ce d efin e s the com b inatio n o f C M Y in k s th at p ro d u ce a
neu tral gray. W ith m o st printin g in ks, sligh tly m ore c yan is n eeded
(typ ically 1 0% -1 4% in the m id -ton es) w ith less, bu t equ al am ou nts o f
m agen ta and yello w. T his is extrem ely critical to g et c orrect, otherw ise
th e im ag e w ill com e out to o ‘w arm ’ (n o t en o u g h c y an ) o r too ‘coo l’ (too
m uch cy an).
D ec iding w here to u se G C R , U C R , M ax. B lac k and h ow to create
neu tral co lor corre ctio n is a m atter o f ap pearance an d ex perien ce. In the
nex t section , th e R IP softw are is ex plain ed and helps you m ak e th is
decisio n.

Working with ColorBurst

T he C o lo rB u rst R IP S o ftw are reads prepared R G B an d C M Y K file s
from th e fo llo w ing p ro gram s:
• P hotoS ho p (T IF and E P S )
• Illu stra tor (E P S v ecto r an d P D F )
• F reeh and (E P S v ecto r an d P D F )
• C o relD raw (E P S vector and P D F )
• Q u ark (P S o r E P S )
• P ageM aker (P S an d E P S )
• In D esign (P S an d E P S )
• A crob at (P D F )
T he R IP so ftw are prepares th e file to b e printed by read in g in the v ecto r
and pix el in fo rm atio n in the o rigin al file an d tran slates th at inform a tio n
in to p ixel ‘screening ’ co lor data that the Vutek prin ter w ill re ad and
p rin t. T h e R G B c o lo r co n v e rsio n to C M Y K and se p aratio n into 4 o r 6
colors h app ens au tom atically d uring the R IP p ro cess. E ac h pixel to be
prin ted at the spe cified P P I (pix els-per-inc h) is ex am in ed fo r its c olo r
den sity and a screening frequ ency is ap plied an d stored in m em ory. A ll
of this d ata is th en refe rred to as an RT L file.

Open File
O n ce C o lorbu rst is lau nch ed, op en a file (F ile → O pe n) o r o pen the last
file w hich w as R IP p ed p rev io usly (see F ig ure 5 -5 ). B y resto ring the last
jo b , a ll o f th e settin g s u se d in that jo b are setup again . T his m ak es for
fa ster p ro du ctio n of sim ilar jo bs or m o re w ork on that sam e la st file.

R IP S tation 5-7
 Figure 5-5 Option Menu

Layout Area
T he L ay ou t A rea group in th e P rin ter O p tion s d ialog bo x allow s yo u to
m odify the size o f th e layo ut are a th at is selected for the curren t printer
(see F ig ure 5 -6 ). T he size o f th e layo ut area is the size represented in the
lay ou t w in d o w an d is u sed in all b est-fit form u las for p ositio n in g im a g es
in a lay o u t. You ca n sav e lay ou t area sizes b y n am e for sub se q u e n t
re call.

Figure 5-6 Printer Option with Printer Setup Window

Options Menus
P rin ter S etup O p tion s C han g in g o f th e Vutek P rin ter S etu p allow s the
u ser to en able 4 , 6 o r 8 c o lo r p rintin g in th e 3 3 6 0 an d chan g es fro m 4 to
6 co lor prin tin g in the 3 36 0. C han ging the R IP ’s prin tin g resolu tion also
can b e d o n e h e re for a ll p rinte rs. T he m ain P rin ter O ptio ns m en u a llo w s

5-8 C hapter 5
adjustm en ts fo r im ag e offse t in the lay ou t are a, m argins betw een
m ultip le im ag es in the lay out, job titles that print abo ve the im a ge (slug
line), registratio n m ark enab lin g, and T C P /IP setu p.
O utp ut O ptions T he O utp u t O ptio ns m e n u allow s the u ser to m ak e
chan g es to the O utp u t D irecto ry (see F ig ure 5 -7 ). T he rip ped file is
w ritten to a d rive loc atio n selected in the O u tpu t D irec tory. B y clicking
on the F in d bu tto n, ano the r driv e loca tio n can b e se lected.

Figure 5-7 PostScript Layout Output File Option Window

P ostScrip t O ptions T his m e nu allow s chan ges in M em ory L im its (see

F igu re 5 -8 ). If the tota l R A M in th e R IP w o rk station is 128 M b, th e
To tal A llocatio n set asid e for C olorbu rst shou ld be 80 M b. If the R A M
am ou nt is 2 56 M b , this settin g can increase up to 16 0 M b , an d if the
R A M is 512 M b, th is total can b e as m u ch as 300 M b. C h ang ing this
setting allo w s C o lorbu rst to R IP faster utilizin g m ore o f th e availab le
R A M reso urces.

R IP S tation 5-9
 Figure 5-8 PostScript Interpreter Options Window

C lick in g the A d v an ced b utto n intro d u c es a w in d o w fo r cha n g in g the

Tem po rary F ile loc atio n (see F ig u re 5 -9 ). C han g in g th is lo catio n to
D :\te m p \jaw s allo w s for fa ster processing since th is D : d riv e is usua lly
larg er th an th e C : W in do w s N T o r W in d o w s 9 8 d rive . U se the
app ro priate drive lette r fo r y our system .

Figure 5-9 Advanced PostScript Options Window

ColorBurst RIP Printer Setup (ENV’s)

In C olorbu rst’s E N V fold er, there are a nu m ber o f d iffe ren t
‘E n viro nm ents’ setu p s fo r d iffe ren t p ap er, p ressure sen sitiv e v in yl,
clo th , an d reinforced v iny l m aterials. T h ese b ase env ironm en ts dictate
w h at percen t of colo r is ap plied to th e m ed ia, the co lo r balanc e o f th e
in k, the b lack ink p erc ent an d to tal ink allow ed in solid in k areas.
F urth erm o re, these b a se en v iro n m ents c an b e m od ified an d sav ed w ith

5-10 C hapter 5
 specific nam es m a kin g it e asier to re m em b er. M ate rials can also be
‘c alib ra ted’. T h is m eans th at th e ink app lied to th e particula r m edia is
color b ala nced , co rrect for its w h ite b alan ce or h ue an d w ith in
accep tab le to tal ink toleran ces.
To ch ang e P rin ter S etu p files (E N V ’s), c lick o n O p tions/R esto re P rinter
S etup and select th e prin ter setup en viro nm ent file listed in the E N V
fo ld er or in ano th er lo cation th e u ser m ay hav e a lready o rg anized. T his
w ill en able color co rrection fo r cu stom er files or partic ula r adjustm en ts
in co lo r th at are n ecessary before ru nn in g th e rip ped file. T h e previo us
jo b last rip ped in C o lorbu rst c an be recalled sim p ly by clic kin g on
F ile/R esto re L ast Jo b (see F ig ure 5-10 ).

Figure 5-10 Options Menu Showing Restore Printer Setup

Creating a Printer Setup File

T he follow in g proced ures perfo rm ed tog eth er create a L in ear.en v file.
T his is u sed in the C o lo rb urst C o lor C alibration sectio n of this c hap ter.

Restoring the UltraVu 3360 Environm ent

To restore a U ltraVu 3360 E n vironm ent, d o th e follow in g:

1 Click Options / Restore Printer Setup.

R IP S tation 5-11
 2 Choose the 3360 Printer Setup in the list.

Disabling ICC Profile Color Managem ent

To d isab le th e IC C P rofile C olor M anagem ent, d o the follow ing (see

F igure 5-11):
1 Open the Options / ICC Profile Options menu.
2 Uncheck the “Disable ICC Profile Color Management”
3 Click Save at the bottom of the window.

Figure 5-11 ICC Profile Options Window

Setting M axim um Ink Densities

To set th e m axim u m in k d en sities, do th e follow ing (see F igu re 5-

12):
1 Open the Options / Color Adjustments menu.
2 Check “Enable Colorburst Color Conversion”
3 Uncheck “Do Ink Balance before Color Adjustments”
4 Uncheck “Enable Grey Replacement (K to CMY)”
5 Make sure that patterned finish is on “Quality Fast"
6 Set Dot Range to 0 and 255.
7 Set all Max Ink densities to 100%.
8 Set your brightness curve to 100%.

5-12 C hapter 5
9 Click Save at the bottom of the window.

Figure 5-12 Color Adjustments Window

Disabling Color Balance

To disab le color b alan cin g, d o th e follow in g (see F igu re 5-13):

1 Open the Options / Ink Balance menu.
2 Uncheck “Enable Black Generation”
3 Uncheck “Enable UCR”
4 Uncheck “Enable Color Balancing”

R IP S tation 5-13
 Figure 5-13 Ink Balance and RGB to CMYK Window

Saving the Printer Setup Settings

To save you r P rin ter S etup , do th e follow in g:

1 Click Options / Save Printer Setup.
2 Save as Linear.env

Calibrating ColorBurst Colors

T he follow in g proced ure is used to achieve an a ccurate co lo r ou tpu t
from th e U ltra Vu 3 36 0. T his proc edu re w ill p rint a ba lan ced, 4-color
graysca le.
N o te: T his p ro cedu res i used for C M Y K file prepa ration only. L ig ht
M ag enta/L ight C yan o r H ex C o lor C a libration w ill be discussed later
in the ch apter.
T here are fou r ba sic step s to prop er co lor calibratio n:
• T he m axim um den sity for the p rim a ry C M Y K ink s m u st be set.
• T he g rad atio n for p ro per m id -to n e d e n sity m ust b e ad ju sted. T he
accu rate m id-to ne values affe ct th e e ntire g ray scale.
• T he ne utral b alan ce fo r 4-co lor grays m ust be ad ju sted. W ith ou t a
neu tral gray b alan ce, a ll other colors w ill be in accurate .

5-14 C hapter 5
 • T he m axim um colo r d ensity an d color b alan ce fo r th e R G B
secon dary co lors m u st be set. T his en sures the red, green, and blu e
colors a re as pu re as po ssible.
B efore yo u beg in the proced ure, y ou sh ou ld h ave th e fo llo w ing
equ ip m e nt av aila ble:
• U ltraVu P rin ter
• M ed ia to b e C alibrated
• C o lorB u rst R IP
• H an d-H eld D en sito m ete r (C alibrated )
You m u st also h ave yo ur printer turned o n, the m ed ia lo aded , an d th e
P late n H eater an d D ry er set to o ptim um reco m m en ded tem p eratures for
th at m aterial (see Vute k’s M aterials D a tab ase a t w w w.vutek.co m ).
M ak e su re the prin ter se tting s, i.e. bi-direc tio nal an d step size
adjustm en ts, are set co rrectly an d th at all jets are firin g.

Setting D-Max for Prim ary CMYK Inks

To set D -m ax, d o the follow in g:

1 Restore the Linear.env. (If you don’t have a Linear.env, see “Creating
a Linear Printer Setup” earlier in this chapter.
2 Locate and RIP the CalTarg.eps
Vute k-su pp lie d im age is supp lied on th e R IP W orkstatio n (see F igu re 5-
14 ).

Figure 5-14 Vutek-supplied Image - CalTarg.eps

R IP S tation 5-15
 3 Determine whether calibration is for maximum saturation (good for
spot colors and vector work) or offset simulation (good for images
and fair for spot and vector). If you print mostly images and only a
few logos and vector art, use offset simulation.
4 Print resulting RTL in the mode to be calibrated (Ultra/Enhanced at
Standard or High speeds)

F or O ffset S im u lation C alibration of Im ages (see F igu re 5-15):

1 Measure the absolute density with the densitometer starting at the
100% patches of CMYK. As you measure down in%-coverage range,
find the values listed below:
Cyan = 1.4 D
M agenta = 1.5 D
Yellow = 1.0 D
Black = 1.6 D

Figure 5-15 Color Adjustments Window

2 Take note of each CMYK % value one step above where these density
values occur. For example, Cyan’s 1.4 density may occur at 50%,
while Yellow’s 1.0 density might be measured at the 85% tile. If the
value can’t be achieved, use the highest value for each.
3 Take note for each CMYK % value one step above where this knee
takes place. If there is no knee, take the highest value.

5-16 C hapter 5
4 In the Color Adjustment menu in ColorBurst, take the CMYK % ink
values from above and insert them in the max ink field for each
process ink color.
5 Again, RIP and print the CalTarg.eps file with these new values.

F or M axim u m S atu ration C alib ration of Vector A rt (see F igu re 5-

15):
1 Measure the density with the densitometer starting at the 100%
patches of CMYK. As you measure down in%-coverage, there will be
a “knee” where the density starts to drop off significantly.
2 Take note for each CMYK % value one step above where this knee
takes place. If there is no knee, use the highest value.
3 In the Options/Color Adjustment menu in ColorBurst, use the CMYK
% ink values noted above and insert them in the max ink field for each
process ink color.
4 Again, RIP and print the CalTarg.eps file with these new values.

Adjusting the M id-tone Density G radation

To ad ju st th e grad ation , d o the follow in g:

1 Measure the 50% patches for the individual CMYK inks. Target all
values at approximately 0.50 density.
2 Adjust these densities by using the curve function in the Edit curve
for each individual CMYK ink (see Figure 5-16). Use the Gamma
function – higher number equals lower density). Refer to modified
curve in image below Cyan Curve.

R IP S tation 5-17
 Figure 5-16 Color Curve Information Window

3 RIP and print the CalTarg.eps file.

Adjusting Neutral Balance (4-Color G rays)

W h ile S tep 2 is b eing p erform e d , m o n ito r the d en sity an d b alan ce o f th e
50 p ercent 4 -co lo r black p atch (see F igu re 5 -1 7). T he target d ensity is
b etw een 0 .7 5 d en sity a n d 0 .9 5 d en sity (dep end in g o n h ow d ark th e m id -
to nes are d esired). Target n eutral b alan ce w ith in 0.0 2 den sity fo r each
C M Y value fo r a w arm neu tral (less C yan ) an d slightly less Yello w th an
C y an and M ag en ta for a co o l n eu tral d ep e n d in g o n p refere n ce.

5-18 C hapter 5
 Figure 5-17 Ink Balance and RGB to CMYK Window

C o rrect th e values th e sam e w ay as in S tep 2 to ach iev e the p ro per

den sity and n eutral b alan ce. (T h is is m o re im p ortan t th an getting 0 .5 0
den sity fo r in divid ual C M Y K in ks as the eye is m o re suscep tible to
neu trals).
N o te: If th e shad ow s a re plugg ed (sha dow filled too ea rly) o r there is
to o m u ch in k in th e 10 0% 4-color black pa tch , low er th e B lack
m a xim um ink field in C o lor A djust m enu a nd equa lly low er the C M Y
gra y ba la nce values in the In k B a la nce m en u. In the even t this ha s to be
do ne, revisit step s 2 and 3 from the beg in nin g.

AdjustIng D-M ax and Color Balance (RGB

Secondary Colors)
A s S tep s 2 an d 3 are being p erform ed, th e 1 00 % R ed, G reen an d B lue
patches can b e adjusted fo r den sity and co lo r ba lanc e.

F or O ffset S im u lation C alibration :

1 Measure the absolute density with the densitometer at the 100%
patches of RGB.
2 Adjust the “Wanted Components” of the Red, Green and Blue in the
Ink Balance menu, even if this means reducing both, until the
following values are achieved (see Figure 5-18):
Red = 1.40 D in M agenta and 1.25 D in Yellow

R IP S tation 5-19
 Green = 1.25 D in Cyan and 1.05 D in Yellow
Blue = 1.45 D in Cyan and 1.15 D in M agenta.
If th e v alu e cann ot b e a chie ved , use the highe st valu e.

Figure 5-18 Ink Balance and RGB to CMYK Window

F or M axim u m S atu ration C alib ration:

1 Adjust the “Wanted Components” of the Red, Green and Blue in the
Ink Balance to achieve the maximum density with the same
relationship between the “Wanted Components” as listed above.

5-20 C hapter 5
ColorBurst Workflow
F igu re 5 -1 9 below sh ow s V U T E k ’s su gg ested w orkflo w for u sing the
C o lorB u rst R IP. F o r m ore in fo rm ation a bou t C o lorB u rst, please refer to
th e C olorB urst U ser ’s M an ua l.

Workflow Using Colorburst

Colorburst workflow
Estimated time lines based on a 2M X 3M Print

Photoshop Output TIFF QuarkXpress Output P.S. Colorburst Output RTL UltraVu
Image editing Vector RIP file Print
and TOTAL TIME
and Page assembly main
retouching and text editing color segment,
calibration etc... 82
minutes
30 minutes 20 minutes 10 minutes 7 minutes 15 minutes

COLOR CORRECTION COMPARISON

Photoshop Output TIFF QuarkXpress Output P.S. Colorburst Output RTL UltraVu
Image editing Vector RIP file Print
WORKFLOW and Page assembly main and
retouching and text editing color segment,
calibration etc...

TYPICAL CMYK CALIBRATION

RGB to CMYK RGB to CMYK MAIN COLOR CALIBRATION HERE

SWOP 20% SWOP 20% CMYK SWOP 20% to VUTEk LUT Correction

6 COLOR LIGHT MAGENTA & CYAN CALIBRATION

RGB to CMYK RGB to CMYK

6 COLOR SEPARATIONS
SWOP 20% SWOP 20% & PRINTER CALIBRATION HERE
Light Magenta & Light Cyan introduced here
CMYK SWOP 20% to VUTEk LUT Correction

Figure 5-19 ColorBurst Workflow Diagram

R IP S tation 5-21
5-22 C hapter 5
 Chapter 6
Netw orking
••••••

Introduction
T his ch apter d escribes ho w to u se the U ltraVu 3 360 P rin ter w ithin a
netw o rk e nviro nm en t. Top ics cov ered inc lud e
• N etw o rk C on figuration s
• C o nfigu ring the R IP W o rk station

Network Configurations
T here are three co nfigu ra tio ns in w hich to run th e U ltraVu 3 36 0: S tand
A lon e, P eer-to-P e er, and S erve r-R ou ter.

Stand Alone
T he first, an d sim p lest co nfigu ratio n, is as a S tan d A lon e W o rk station
(see F ig ure 6 -1 ). In this co n fig u ratio n , files are b ro u g h t to the p rin ter o n
a rem o v ab le d isk , o r som e o th er fo rm o f m e d ia. N o rm ally, th is m ea n s
th at a file w ill b e “ rip ped ” on the prin ter.

Figure 6-1 Stand Alone Configuration

F or sm all files, o r jo bs th at are not tim e-cru cial, this is th e best, m ost
dep end able, safest, and ea siest con figu ratio n. If h ow ever, files are to be
prin ted an d “ripp ed ” at the sam e tim e, a great am ou nt o f th e system
re so urces w ill be d edicated to th e prin tin g sid e. T h is m ea ns tha t the
“ripp in g ” fu nctio n w ill slo w do w n d ra m a tically. T he effects of th is
w h ile d oing large jo bs m a y be m in im ized w ith prop er job sch edu lin g.
B y rip pin g th e large r jo b s and p rintin g them first, the p ro g ressiv ely

N etw orking 6-1

 sm aller jobs can b e ripp ed w hile printing th e p rior larg er job . P rop er job
sched uling ca n o ften elim inate tim e con flicts. In la rg er op eratio ns w h ere
2 4 h ou r o p eratio n s are c o m m o n , jo b sch ed ulin g o f this sort b ecom es
d iffic u lt. T h e loss in tim e m a y even b e in tolera b le to som e o p erato rs.
T he tran sfer o f files fro m the sou rc e to th e U ltraVu req uires a p hy sical
trip in-han d, a nd o perato r in terven tio n to put the file o n th e h ard drive .
T his also m ay be in to lerable in som e ap plication s. T he “S tan d A lon e”
con figu ration ho w ev er, is by far the m ost stable an d reliable . You r
V U T E k U ltraVu 3 3 6 0 is ready -to-go a s-is in this co n fig u ratio n .
N o te: Vu tek recom m en ds tha t th e Sta nd -A lone N etw o rk C on fig ura tio n
on ly be u sed in a n em ergency situatio n.

Peer-to-Peer
In th e nex t co nfig uration, a sim p le “ P ee r-to -P eer” netw o rk has b een set
u p (see F ig u re 6 -2 ). T his m ay b e c o n v enien t for tw o rea so ns. F irst,
transferrin g the files from o ne w orkstatio n to the U ltraVu 3 36 0 is d on e
sim ply by c opy in g th e files from the local d irecto ry on the extern al
w o rk station to th e hard driv e on the U ltraVu.

Figure 6-2 Peer-to-Peer Configuration

O n ce the files a re gen erated o n th e w o rk station , th ey m ay also be

“ripp ed” there. T h is has th e a dvan tag e of sav in g ov erh ead (syste m
re so urces) o n th e U ltraVu and leaving the p rinter to d o w h at it do es b est
- p rint. T his req uires th e add ition of a sec ond w o rk station w ith a N IC , a
com p atib le o perating syste m , an d a 1 0/100 base -T N etw ork H U B . T h is
also requ ires som eon e fam iliar w ith ne tw o rk in g to p ro perly c onfig ure
and m aintain the w o rk station , an d de velo p w h ate ver sec urity p olicies
are requ ired.

6-2 C hapter 6
Server-Router
T he la st con fig uration u ses a P C runn in g as a serve r-ro uter de dica ted
solely fo r th is fun ction (see F igu re 6-3). T his “S erver” w ou ld hav e tw o
N IC s. O n e N IC w o uld con nect to a L A N (L ocal A rea N etw o rk ) th at the
custom er alrea dy h as insta lled and is su ppo rtin g. A secon d N IC is
in stalled an d th e serve r is con figu red a s a “rou ter”. T h is w o uld a llo w
files to b e tran sferred to the se rv er-ro uter via th e ne tw o rk . O n ce the files
are there, the server/rou ter c an “R IP ” them . T h en the “ripp ed ” file ca n
be tran sferre d to the U ltraVu 33 60 o ver the seco nd seg m e nt o f th e
netw o rk . S in ce this is a p hy sically separate seg m ent, an d th e serve r-
ro uter w ill o nly transm it to th e sub-ne t of the in ten ded target, th e
“ripp ed ” file is k ept o ff th e norm al L A N .

Figure 6-3 Server-Router Configuration

If the “rip ped ” an d ready to print file is tra nsm itted on the m ain p ortio n
of the n etw ork, the n etw ork hardw are an d resources w ill b e tied up
w h ile the file m ake its w ay to th e U ltra Vu W o rk station . T h e
con figu ratio n show n ab ove w ill prov ide m ultip le u se rs access to the
U ltraVu W orksta tio n and allo w “rip pin g ” to take p lace o n th e serve r,
th ereb y freeing u p th e system to p erfo rm print fu nction s.
T he U ltra Vu 3 3 6 0 is equ ip ped w ith o n ly th e m ost ru d im e n tary n etw o rk
set-up . In ad ditio n to no p assw o rd an d m inim al acc ess to the hard drive
on the U ltraVu W orkstatio n, users a cro ss a ne tw o rk m u st “M ap a
N etw o rk D rive” u sing the “G uest” a ccou nt. It is the cu stom er ’s
re sp on sibility to learn ho w to do th is, or h ire a n etw ork professio nal.
U n der no circu m stanc es w ill V U T E k giv e adv ice on con figuration s
ou tsid e the U ltraVu. T his co nfig uratio n ha s b een te sted an d con firm ed
at V U T E k, an d is the only com po nen t of an y n etw ork con figu ration that
V U T E k w ill su ppo rt. If y ou in ten d to conn ect the U ltraVu 33 60 to a
netw o rk , V U T E k recom m end s th at y ou hire a local netw o rk con sultant

N etw orking 6-3

 to assist y o u . V U T E k d oes n o t p ro v id e n etw o rk h a rd w are, so ftw are,
con figu ration s, serv ice, o r sup port of an y k ind o utside the U ltraVu 3 360 ,
or custo m n etw ork con figu ratio ns w ithin.

Configuring the RIP W orkstation

T he in ten t of this w orkstatio n is to provide a w o rk station that w ill
perform the functio ns of ripp ing a file w hile allow ing the U ltraVu 3 36 0
C P U to be ded icated to printin g an im ag e. Typically, the R IP station
w o uld prov ide a ready -to-prin t RT L file an d place it on a d rive th at is
lo cal to the U ltraVu 3 3 6 0 W orksta tio n .
O ther sc enario s m ay b etter suit th e c usto m er ho w ev er. F o r ex am ple,
ripp ing the file an d leav ing it o n the R IP W o rk station o n a driv e th at the
U ltraVu 33 60 sees across the n etw ork, but interp re ts as a local d rive.
ripp ing th e file and directing th e R IP to outpu t th e file to a drive o n the
U ltraVu 33 60 that the R IP W o rk station sees across th e n etw ork, bu t
in terprets as a local drive. O r sim ply ripp ing the file to a drive local to
th e R IP W o rk station , a n d m an ually m o v in g it later, m a y p ro v id e a m ore
con ven ien t transfer o f th e data an d be tter fit th e c usto m er's sched ule.
In any ev ent, it is hig hly rec om m end ed th at driv es o n th e U ltraVu
W orksta tio n and th e R IP W o rk station be shared and th en m app ed acro ss
th e n etw ork. T he ba sic proced ures are ou tline d below.

To sh are a w ork station , d o the follow in g:

1 Ensure the network card is operating properly.
If th e N IC h as been in stalled co rrectly, th ere sh ou ld be a 3 -C o m ico n on
th e task bar. If y ou m o ve dow n to the task bar and click on th e ico n, th ere
w ill b e a w arn in g scre en th at app ears inform ing y ou that run ning the
d iagn ostics w ill d isc o n n ect the w o rk station from the n etw o rk . A t th is
tim e, click C o ntinu e. T h e 3C o m D iag nostics W ind ow w ill disp lay (see
F igu re 6 -4 ).
N o te: If you receive a m essag e that info rm s you th at "... the card is n ot
in stalled ..." or th at "... the ca rd ha s n ot been detected ...", then proceed
to the section entitled "In stallin g th e card".

6-4 C hapter 6
 Figure 6-4 3Com NIC Diagnostics (General) Window

2 Click the Diagnostics tab and perform a selftest (see Figure 6-5).

Figure 6-5 3Com NIC Diagnostics (Diagnostics) Window

C lick S tart to beg in th e selftest. If th e n etw ork cab le is plugg ed in, a ll

th e tests sho uld pass. Yo u sho uld clo se the w ind ow at this tim e.
3 From the desktop double-click (left button) the My Computer Icon.

N etw orking 6-5

 4 Right click the C Drive and select Sharing (see Figure 6-6),

Figure 6-6 My Computer Window

T he (C :): P ro perties W in do w w ill ap pea r (see F ig ure 6-7).

Figure 6-7 (C:) Properties (Sharing) Window

P lease no te th e S h are N am e. Yo urs w ill prob ably be different. Yo u

sho uld how eve r, m ake th e share n am e fairly sim ple. If the share nam e
con tains a "$" character, th en d o n ot ch ang e it. If it is a n am e m a ke sure
th e d rive le tter app ears in it (e.g. "3 360 -C " o r "336 0-D "). F or the R IP
W orksta tio n , y o u w o u ld n am e it "R IP -C " o r "R IP -D ".

6-6 C hapter 6
5 Click the arrow next to the name to determine what other shares are
installed.
If th e o nly share installed either con tain s a "$" in its nam e, or is ca lled
"D efault S hare", click o n N ew S hare an d create a n ew sha re n am e . W ith
a prop er na m e in the S ha re N am e b ox , click P erm ission s. T h e A ccess
T hrou gh S ha re P erm ission W in do w w ill ap pea r (see F ig ure 6-8).

Figure 6-8 Access Through Share Permissions Window

M ak e su re tha t y ou A d d or R em o ve sh ares so th at the scree n loo ks like

th e o ne ab ov e. T h e d ro p-do w n m en us w ill gu id e you .
6 Repeat this procedure for all the non-removable fixed disks,
assigning a unique name for each.
7 Once this procedure is complete on the UltraVu Workstation, move
to the RIP Station and share each drive.
8 Label them as described previously.
O n ce the sh aring is co m ple te on b oth w o rk station s, yo u m ust m ap the
driv e(s).
N o te: D rive m app in g is a proced ure tha t selects a drive a cro ss th e
netw ork, an d tells th e loca l w o rkstation to u se it as a lo cal d rive. A fter
m a pp ing is com pleted, m o vin g da ta from one w orksta tion o n the
netw ork to an oth er is as sim p le as co pyin g from o ne d rive to a no ther.

To m ap a drive, d o th e follow in g:
1 Double click on the Network Neighborhood Icon.
2 Find the workstation that's across the network and double click it.
3 Locate the hard drive that you want to map and right click on it.

N etw orking 6-7

 4 From the drop-down menu, select Map Network Drive.
5 Use the default drive letter provided, and be sure the box Reconnect
at Logon option is checked.
6 Repeat this procedure for each remote drive that needs to be
mapped.
7 Move to the other workstation and repeat the procedure.
You sh ou ld n ow h ave tw o w o rkstatio ns (U ltraVu W orkstation an d th e
R IP W o rk station ) th at com m un icate w ith each oth er's rem ote d rives as
th oug h th ey w ere local.
A t this p oin t, fu rth er c o n fig u ration sh o u ld b e left u p to the cu sto m er.
T he cu stom er is now able to con figu re th e R IP W orkstation to pla ce
files direc tly o n th e U ltra Vu W o rk station , o r co nfigu re the U ltraVu
W orksta tio n to take files fro m their R IP W o rk station .

Installing the NIC Card

If the N IC is no t installe d, o r if the card doe s no t op era te, y ou w ill n eed
to rein stall it u sing the in struction s belo w. In o rd er to perfo rm th is
o p era tio n , y o u m u st u se th e W in d o w s N T ® C D and eith er the 3-C o m
E th erD isk D iske ttes (x 2 ) o r the R e co v e ry C D .
T he first step y o u m ust p erfo rm is rem o v e th e c ard . M a k e sure the
w o rk station is p ow ered off. F irst, phy sically rem ov e the card fro m the
w o rk station . Turn th e unit on and allo w it to bo ot.

W hen the w ork station has booted , d o th e follow in g:

1 Open the Network Configuration Dialog Box.
2 Click the Adapter tab at the top.
3 If an adapter is listed, highlight it and select Remove.
4 Close the dialog box and re-boot the workstation.
5 After the workstation has booted, verify that the adapter has been
removed by returning to the Network Configuration Dialog Box and
checking the list.
6 When asked to install one, select No.
7 Shut the workstation down and physically install the network card.
8 Power the workstation up and allow the system to boot.
9 If the system informs you that it has found new PCI hardware, then
allow it to install.
C a u tion : D o not a llo w the w o rkstatio n to in stall any of it's ow n 3 -C om
drivers!

6-8 C hapter 6
10 If the system finds a network adapter, make sure that the first time
you see the option "HAVE DISK" that you select it.
11 If the system does not find the network adapter, then return to the
Network Configuration Dialog Box, click the Adapter tab, select Add,
and then select HAVE DISK.
12 At this point, you may either
• B row se the ha rd d isk for the E th erD isk d irecto ry
• B ro w se the R eco v ery C D fo r th e 3 -C om o r E th e rD isk d ire cto ry
• In sert D isk 1 of the E th erD isk insta llatio n disk ettes.
C lick O K .
13 If you are given a choice between two adapters, select 3C905. If you
only have one choice, select it.
14 Follow the screen prompts.
If custo m er is run nin g T C P /IP, h e w ill h av e to su p p ly y ou w ith the
app ro priate num b ers later o n in this p ro cedu re. If he is no t runn in g
T C P /IP, click o n th e P roto cols tab and m ak e su re th at N etB E U I and IP X
com p atib le p ro toco ls are installed (see F ig ure 6 -9).

Figure 6-9 Network (Protocols) Window

If y o u d o n 't n eed th e T C P /IP, h ig h lig h t it an d click o n R em o v e .

N etw orking 6-9

 15 Make sure the proper services are loaded.
A s a m inim um y ou sh ou ld h ave th e fo llo w ing item s:
• W orkstatio n
• S erv er
• N etB io s
• W orkstatio n B row ser
U sing the abo ve item s, an installed adap ter (see F igu re 6 -9 ) an d th e
prop er n etw ork protoco ls (see F igu re 6 -1 0), y ou are re ady to beg in .

Figure 6-10 Network (Adapters) Window

6-10 C hapter 6
 Figure 6-11 Network (Services) Window

N o te: A n y tim e you ch an ge an yth in g in the netw o rk settin gs you 're

prob ably going to ha ve to re-b oo t th e w orksta tion.
If th ere is no S h aring o ption w h en th e p ull-do w n m en u fo r th e drive is
activated, th ere are a few things to check . F irst, go to the co ntro l pan el
and fin d th e ico n fo r S ervice s. T his is d on e b y do ub le-clicking M y
C o m p u ter, o r click in g o n the S tart b utto n , an d th en selectin g S e tting s.
16 Open up the Services control box by double-clicking on it. Scroll
down the list until you find the service named Server (see Figure 6-
12).

N etw orking 6-11

 Figure 6-12 Services Window

If there is no "S erver" serv ice listed, then yo u eith er n eed to in stall it in
th e N etw ork setu p, or re-bu ild N T. T h is proced ure w ill b e d escribed
later. If it d o es n o t a p p e ar, g o to S tep 2 1.
17 Double click highlighted line and the Service Window will appear (see
Figure 6-13):

Figure 6-13 Services Window

18 Ensure the Automatic option is selected and click OK.

19 When back to the Services control box, click on Start. If the service
fails to start, close the box and restart the workstation.

6-12 C hapter 6
20 Attempt to share the drive again. If the Sharing selection still does
not appear, go to "Installing the Server Service". If the drives are now
shareable, configure them as described in the "Setup and
Configuration" document.
21 From the Control Panel, select Network.
22 From the Network Window, click the Services tab (see Figure 6-14).

Figure 6-14 Network (Services) Window

23 Highlight the Server. If Server is not listed, you must install it as

described in the section entitled "Installation".
If S erv er is listed he re, bu t is n ot in th e S e rv ices C o ntrol B ox (see F ig ure
6 -1 2 ), y o u n e ed to clic k R em o v e. O n ce y o u h av e selected all th e v alues
th at allow y ou to re m o ve th e serv ice, clo se the d ialo g bo x an d re-bo ot
th e w orkstation.
O n ce the w orkstatio n has re-bo oted return to th e N etw ork C o nfig uratio n
D ialo g B ox (see F ig ure 6 -1 4). T h e S erve r S erv ice w ill n ot ap pea r.

N etw orking 6-13

 Installation

To in stall the service, d o th e follow in g:

1 Click Add and the Select Network Services Window appears (see
Figure 6-15):

Figure 6-15 Selecting Network Services Window

2 Click on OK and follow the on screen instructions. You will need the
Windows NT® CD. Once installed no further configuring of this
service is needed.
C lo se the d ialog b ox an d allow the system to re-bo ot. A fter re-b oo tin g
attem pt to share the d rives a gain . If y ou are no t su ccessful, y ou m ust re-
in stall the N T O perating S y stem .
N o te: T h e easiest w a y to re-install or repair an N T O pera ting S ystem is
to u se the insta lla tion C D . T h e p ro cedu re is described b elo w.

Configuring the Workstation

You r U ltraVu 33 60 an d associated R IP W orkstatio n w ill b oo t from th e
C D -R O M if con fig u red p ro p erly. D ep en din g o n the release d ate o f y o u r
equ ip m e n t, it m a y a lre ady b e co n figu red for a d efau lt b o o t fro m the C D .
If th is is the case, all y ou n eed to do is insert th e C D in the C D -R O M
D riv e and turn on the de vice . If th e w orkstation b oots from the C D
succe ssfully, y o u w ill see the W in d o w s N T ® In stallation /R ep air M en u
S cree n.

6-14 C hapter 6
 If th e sy stem is not curren tly con figu red for a C D -B o ot, yo u w ill n eed
to m an ually co nfig ure it. B ut b efo re this can b e do ne yo u w ill n eed to
determ ine w h eth er y ou h ave a S C S I C D -R O M or an ID E C D -R O M .
T he sim p lest w a y to m ak e this d eterm ina tio n is to loo k at th e fron t of the
C D -R O M . If it is la bele d "C rea tiv e L a bs" it's an ID E . If there is no
brand -n am e on the C D -R O M D riv e, then it is a S C S I D riv e.

Configuring and Booting from an IDE CD-ROM

To con figu re you r device to b oot an ID E C D , follow these step s.

1 Put the Windows NT CD in the CD-ROM Drive and turn on the system.
2 Go into your BIOS set-up by pressing the <DEL> key upon start-up.
3 Select "BIOS Features" Set Up.
4 Using the arrow keys, move down to the line that says "Boot
Sequence" and change it so that "CD-ROM" appears first.
5 Exit this screen by pressing ESCAPE.
6 Press the "F10" key to exit and save.
You r system sh o u ld n o w b o o t from the C D . A fter y ou h av e p e rfo rm ed
any rep airs n ecessary, y ou m ay w ant to ch ang e the B IO S bac k, (to a
bo ot seq uen ce of "A , C " fo r ex am p le).

Configuring and Booting from a SCSI CD-ROM

If you r C D -R O M D rive is S C S I, follow th ese step s to m ak e you r

w ork station b oot from th e C D .
1 Place the Windows NT® CD in the CD-ROM Drive and turn on the
system.
2 Watch the screen carefully until you see the message "Press <Ctrl>
<A> to enter SCSI Select Utility".
3 When the screen appears, press the Ctrl key and the A key
simultaneously.
4 Select Configure/View Host Adapter Settings.
5 Select Additional Options.
6 Select Boot Device Options.
7 Select Boot SCSI ID and change the number to 4.
8 Back out of the screens using <Esc> until you see "Advanced
Configurations" and select it.
9 Select Reset SCSI bus at IC Initialization and change it to Enabled.
10 Select Host Adapter BIOS (Configuration Utility Reserves BIOS
space) and change to Enabled

N etw orking 6-15

 11 Select BIOS Support of bootable CDs and change to Enabled.
12 Exit the Setup Utility.
You r dev ice sh ou ld no w b oo t from the S C S I C D -R O M D riv e. A fter y ou
p erform an y rep airs n ecessary y o u sho uld n o t n eed to cha n g e an y th in g
back to o rigin al. You w ill see a m essag e u po n bo ot that say s "N o B oo t
D ev ices F ou nd ".

Repairing the NT Operating System

To rep air you r N T ® O p eratin g S ystem , do th e follow ing:

1 Place the Windows NT® installation CD in the CD-Rom Drive and
boot from the installation floppies.
N o te: If yo ur system is co nfigu red to bo ot fro m th e C D you w on 't n eed
to u se the flop pies.
2 When booting from the floppies, follow the on-screen instructions
until you get to the installation/repair menu screen.
W h en bo otin g from th e C D , the installatio n/repa ir m en u scree n w ill
com e up w itho ut u ser in terven tion.T h e m en u has four cho ices.
3 Press "R" to select the "To repair a damaged Windows NT version
4.0 installation, press R" option.
You w ill th en see a screen w ith fo ur optio ns w ith "X " m ark s in b rac kets.
4 Using the arrow keys, move to each one and make sure they all have
an "X" in the selection box.
If no t, h ig hligh t th em w ith the arro w k eys on y ou r key bo ard and p ress
E nter to plac e (or rem o ve) the "X " m ark s.
5 Select "Continue…", press Enter and follow the directions on the
screen.

6-16 C hapter 6
 Chapter 7
M aintenance
••••••

Maintaining the Printer

T his c hap ter con tain s m a intenan ce proc edu res an d a sch edu le de tailin g
ho w o fte n to perfo rm th em . Yo u m ust m a intain the U ltraVu 3 36 0 p rinter
o n a reg u lar b asis to k eep it ru n n in g at th e h ig hest p erfo rm an c e lev el.

Schedule Details
B elow is d etailed inform a tio n for p erform in g different levels o f
m ain tena nce as ou tlined in th e M ain ten ance S ched ule fo und a t the en d
of the ch apter. V U T E k reco m m ends th at th e sched ule b e cop ied an d
placed w here it can b e seen, i.e. o n th e printer o r nea r th e ope rator ’s
station .

After Printing Each Segment

• P erfo rm the P urg e Test F u n c tio n to reco v er a n y lost jets b efore
starting th e nex t segm en t.

Every Eight (8) Hours

• C le an th e su rface o f th e p rint h eads w ith U ltraVu H ead C lean ing
F luid.
• T he carriage rails o n th e U ltraVu 3 36 0 prin ter m u st be lu bricated
every eigh t ho urs w ith petroleum base d oil (e.g. 3 in 1 oil).
C a u tion : S ynthetic oil sho uld not be used to lu bricate the C a rriag e
R ails.

Daily
• C h eck filter an d w ater trap o n th e inc om in g A ir S upp ly S y stem .
E m pty or replace w h en ne eded .
• C h eck th e W aste Tan k and e m p ty w hen necessary.
• C le an all P inch R ollers w ith P M A cetate (P M A ).
N o te: U sing so lven ts o th er tha n P M A ceta te ca n leave a residu e on th e
ro llers th at w ill a ffect printing . If P M A is n ot a vaila ble, U ltraVu H ea d
C leaning F luid can b e used . P M A ceta te is ava ilable throu gh Vu tek.

M aintenance 7-1
 Weekly
• R ep lace or clean the fo am filters on th e ou tside o f each of the fan s on
th e C arria ge A ssem bly. E n sure the fan b lade s are clea n before
re plac ing .

Monthly
• R em ov e and c lean the S econ dary Ink C a ns and F lo at S enso rs.
• R em ov e and c lean the Ink L ev el S ensors.
• C le an th e E d g e D etecto r len s w ith a clean lin t free c lo th o r w ip e.
• C h eck th e tension o n th e C arria ge D riv e B elt.

Quarterly
• R ep lace in -lin e filters o n C arriage every th re e m o nth s o r w h enev er a
’C heck F ilter E rror ’ m essa g e o cc u rs.
• C h ang e the in -lin e ink filters for the C M Y K In k F eed L in es.

Bi-annually
• R em ov e du st from P o w er S upp ly an d S erv o C o ntro llers w ith
com p ressed air.

Annually
• R ep lace th e tw o in -line filters (solv ent and air feed lines) o n th e
C arriage
• C le an or rep lace the P rim ary Ta nk F ilters.

Maintenance Procedures

Cleaning the UltraVu 3360

W ith the ex ception of the Jet P ack s, th e U ltraVu 3 36 0 D igital P rinting
S ystem m ay b e cleane d w ith g e n eral cle an in g clo th s a n d cleanin g
com p oun ds. W h en cle anin g th e print head s, a clea n ro om qu ality, lin t-
free cle anin g cloth m u st be used .
N o te: O n ly a clea n roo m style lint-free clea nin g cloth o r w ip e th at m eets
V U T E k sp ecifica tio ns m ay be used to w ipe the in k an d solvent fro m the
Jet P a ck su rfa ces. U sing o th er types of clea nin g clo th s o r w ipes w ill
da m a ge th e p rin t hea d surfa ces an d void th e w arran ty on the p rint
hea ds.

7-2 C hapter 7
You m ay p urcha se the spec ial lint-fre e c lean ing c loth fro m V U T E k.
T hese w ipes can b e pu rch ased fro m Vutek Inc. or from the v end or
d irectly. L iste d b elow is the p ro d u ct inform atio n an d a list o f co n ta ct
in fo rm ation fo r the p urchasing c han nels w orld w ide. T his is th e prim ary
con tact for p urch a sin g w ip e s, d istrib u tio n w ill b e fro m lo cal v en do rs in
yo ur area. C o ntact you r nearest P urchasin g C ha nne l o ffice for o rd er and
shipping inform atio n.

Recommended Linf-Free Cloth

Vendor Information: Super Polx 1200

Description: 100% Laundered Polyester
Size: 9" x 9"
Vender Number: S1200.0909.8
Sheets/Pack: 150
Pack/Case: 8
Vutek Number (Case): P.9450-A

Purchasing Channels:
C all any o f th e P u rchasin g C h ann els fo r the reg io nal d istrib ution
in fo rm ation . R e fer to th e in fo rm ation b elo w for P urch asing C han nel
lo cation an d con tact inform ation.

North America, South America, Europe, Australia, Africa, and the

Canada and Mexico Middle East

Berkshire Corporation Berkshire International Ltd.

River Street 122 Castelnau
Great Barrington, MA 01230 USA London SW13 9EU United Kingdom
Phone 800-242-7000 Phone 44-20-8748-8590 (UK)
413-528-2602
Fax 413-528-2614 Fax 44-20-8741-3058
E-mailusa@berkshire.com E-mail sales@berkshire.uk.com

Southeast Asia, Singapore, India Northern Asia, Japan,, Korea, Taiwan,

Thailand, Hong Kong, and Malaysia, and China
and the Philippines

Berkshire International Limited Berkshire Company Limited

M aintenance 7-3
 51, Goldhill Plaza #14-09 Kaede No. 2 Building 6F
Singapore 308900 2-5-10 Shin-Yokohama, Kohoku-ku
Phone:65-252-4313 Yokohama, Kanagawa 222-0033, Japan
Fax 65-252-4312 Phone 81-45-477-4481
E-mailberkshire_asia@pacific.net.sg Fax 81-45-477-4484
E-mail tokyo@berkshire.com

Caring for the Jet Pack

T he printin g su rface o f th e Jet P a ck m u st b e ke pt w et w ith either in k or
U ltraVu H ead C lean in g F luid. F ailu re to use U ltraVu H ead C lean in g
F luid w ill result in d am age to the je t pack s.

Jet Pack Covering Procedure

W h en the prin ting op eratio n is finished for th e sh ift o r the day, th e P rint
H ea ds m ust be cov ered . To preven t the ink fro m dryin g in the jets, y ou
m ust p e rfo rm a sim p le cov erin g p ro ced u re.
N o te: If th e prin ter w ill be p ow ered o ff fo r m ore tha n a d ay, Vu tek
sug gests th at the Jet P a cks be em p tied an d filled w ith solvent. U se the
E m p ty P ack a nd S olvent P u rge fun ctio n to p erfo rm th is step.

To p rep are th e Jet P ack s for w hen th e p rinter is n ot b ein g used , you
n eed to p erform th e follow in g steps:
1 Move the Printer Function Selector Switch to the Capper Down
position (see Figure 7-1).

Figure 7-1 Printer Selector Switch

2 Place the Capper Pad on top of the Capper so it is level with its
surfaces and cover with a sheet of polyethylene wrap.

7-4 C hapter 7
3 Carefully fold and place VUTEk approved cloths (PN P9450-A) onto
the polyethylene wrap so that the entire surface is evenly covered.
There should be no gaps, wrinkles or bumps in the covering.
4 Generously soak the cloths with VUTEk approved Head Cleaning
Fluid.
5 Move the Printer Function Selector Switch to the Capper Up position.
6 This positions the Capper Plate under the Print Heads.
N o te: T h e p rinter w ill a utom a tically w eep ink (an d so lven t) th rou gh th e
P rint H ea d Jets w h en th e C arria ge is in the H om e positio n an d is
po w ered u p. T he C ap per w ill co llect ink as long a s th e C a pp er is u nd er
th e C a rriag e. W hile th e C a pp er rem ains u nder the C arria ge, the ink w ill
dra in in to the Wa ste Tan k.

Rem oving the Jet Packs

If it is necessary to rem ove th e Jet P ack s, you w ill need to do th e

follow in g:
1 Empty the Jet Packs of ink.
U se E m p ty P ack F u nction for each color in seq uen ce u ntil n o ink flow s
from th e jets.
2 Perform a Solvent Purge.
You w ill ne ed to pu rg e for 3 0 secon ds o r un til p urged so lve nt exitin g the
jets ap pea rs clear. T h is ensu res th at no ink is left in th e pack to dry the
orifices.
3 Power down the printer.
C a u tion : You m ust w a it for L E D # 3 o n the H V D river B oa rd to
exting uish befo re ch an gin g a Jet P a ck.
4 Remove the two screws holding each Jet Pack Assembly to the
Carriage Plate.
5 Pull connector down to remove from the Backplane.
6 Place each Print Head on a lint-free, cleanroom cloth.
N o te: F a ilu re to store the Jet P acks correctly w ill result in clog ged jets
an d w ill perm an ently dam ag e the P rint H ea ds. A ny Jet P acks retu rned
to V U T E k for servicing m ust b e p rep ared in this m an ner or th ey w ill be
rejected .

M aintenance 7-5
 Installing the Jet Packs

To in stall the Jet P acks, do th e follow ing:

1 Ensure o-rings are installed into the recessed holes located on the
Jet Pack Assembly.
2 Align the Edge Connector on the Jet Driver Board with the Backplane
Connector.
You sho uld feel th e E d ge C on nector m ate w ith th e co nn ecto r and seat it
in to p lace.
3 Install Bezel Screws to hold unit in place.
T his sh o u ld b e d o n e b y lig h tly tig hten in g th e sc rew s, p ro c eeding fro m
fron t to b ack . It is im po rtant that all scre w s ho lding the Jet P ack are
even ly torqu ed b e fo re tig h ten in g them .
4 Hand tighten the screws.

Changing O ver Ink Colors

T his p ro ce d u re is to b e u sed w h en chan g in g in k typ es. T his w ill in struct
y o u o n e m p ty in g , flu sh in g and p rim in g o f the in k system .
N o te: T he S econ da ry Ink Ta nks an d Jet P a cks m ust b e em p tied an d
flushed w ith in k com p atible solvent p rior to the ch ang e over of inks.

Required M aterials

Allen w renches

C ontainers for disposal of old ink

Latex gloves recom m ended to avoid ink getting on the skin

Vutek H ead C leaning Solvent for cleanup purposes

Supply of clean cloths and/or absorbent m aterial

7-6 C hapter 7
 To m ak e an in k ch an ge over, you w ill n eed to d o th e follow in g:
1 Select the Empty Pack function and depress the appropriate color
button until all Jet Packs are empty (see Figure 7-2).

Figure 7-2 Printer Selector Switch

2 Select the Solvent Purge function and purge the Jet Packs until the
solvent exiting the Jet Pack is relatively clear.
A t th is p oint, the Je t P ack s and lines after the secon dary ink ta nks shou ld
all b e flu sh e d w ith solven t.
N o te:T h e solvent w ill n ever be to tally clear exiting the Jet P acks or
th rou gh the in k lin es.
3 Shut down the UltraVu Workstation Operating System and power
down the printer.
4 Place a piece of vinyl under the Ink Cabinet and along the front of the
printer.
T his sh ould con tain any ink sp ills tha t m a y occu r w hile chan ging o ver
th e ink .
5 Using a hand pump empty contents of each Primary Tank into an
appropriate container.
W h en em pty, w ip e the resid ual ink o ut o f th e P rim ary Ink Ta nks w ith
lint-free w ipes.
6 Fill the primary ink tank with enough clean VUTEk Head Cleaning
Solvent.
T his w ill tem p orarily co rrect any low in k error co nd ition s th at w ill occu r
w ith the tan ks em pty.
7 Power up the printer. When ready, use the Ink Prime function on each
color until you can see the solvent feeding through the ink lines into
the secondary ink tanks.

M aintenance 7-7
 8 Select the Empty Pack function and empty the Jet Packs.
T his w ill rem ov e th e so lve nt fro m the S econ dary Ink Tank s.
9 Select the Solvent Purge function and purge until the solvent coming
out of the Jet Packs is clear.
A t this p oin t, the Jet P ack s a n d lin es fro m the S econ dary In k Ta n k s
sho uld be flush ed w ith solven t.
10 Shut down the UltraVu Workstation Operating System and power
down the printer.
11 Remove the Primary Ink Tanks and empty the contents.
W h en em p ty, w ip e o u t a n y resid ual so lven t an d ink w ith lin t-free w ip e s.
N o te: If the n ew in k solvent is no t com pa tible w ith Vutek H ea d C lean in g
So lven t, refill the P rim ary In k Tanks w ith the in k m a nufacturer ’s
reco m m end ed solvent. R ep eat steps 7 th ro ug h 11.
12 Remove the Secondary Ink Tank Covers and clean thoroughly with
lint-free wipes. Clean the Level Sensors/Floats and replace the Ink
Tank Cover Assembly.
13 Replace the In-line Ink Filters located on the carriage (see the
"Replacing the Carriage Air and Solvent Filter" section for details).
14 Using a hand pump empty contents of each Primary Tank into an
appropriate container.
W h en em pty, w ip e out any resid ual so lve nt o r in k w ith lint-fre e w ip es.
R ep lace th e P rim ary Ink Tank F ilters.
15 Refill the Primary Ink Tanks with the new ink.
16 Power up the printer. Select the Ink Prime function and prime until the
front ink line feeding the Jet Plate is free of air bubbles
(approximately 10 to 20 seconds).
17 Select the Ink Purge and purge until ink is coming out of all jets.
18 Load material and print a test image.
It m ay ta ke an im age or tw o before an y air o r resid ual so lv ent from th e
chan geo ver clears up an d all jets are firin g.

Lubricating the Carriage Rails

T he C arriag e R ails o n the U ltraVu 3 3 6 0 p rinter m u st b e lu b rica ted eve ry
eig ht h ou rs w ith a pe tro leu m b ased o il.
C a u tion : To p revent d am ag e to th e C arriage Sliders, yo u sho uld n ot u se
synthetic oil.

7-8 C hapter 7
 To lu bricate th e C arriage R ails, p erform these step s:
1 With the Carriage in the home position, apply a small amount of
lubricant to a lint free cloth and wipe a thin film evenly over the
surfaces of the two Carriage Rails see Figure 7-3).
C a u tion : W hen u sing o il a void ap plying directly onto rails. O il m ay
drip on to th e m ed ia a nd d am age the print.

Top Rail

Lower Rail

Figure 7-3 Lubricating the Carriage Rails

2 Take the printer offline and open and then close the Pinch Rollers.
Put the printer back online. The Carriage will move to the right to
scan the material and return to the home position.
3 Wipe the rings on both ends of the Carriage rail. Be sure to wipe any
excess oil from the rails and the Optical Encoder Strip before
returning the printer to operation.

Replacing the Carriage Air and Solvent Filter

To replace th e A ir and S o lv ent L ines F ilters (see F igu re 7-4 ), you m u st
first turn the M ain A ir R eg ulato r to zero an d b leed off all p re ssu re from
th e S o lve nt Ta nk S ystem .

M aintenance 7-9
 Air Filter Solvent Filter

Figure 7-4 In-line Ink Filter

To chan ge th e filters, you w ill n eed to p erform the follow in g step s:

1 Power down the printer.
2 Place a cloth under the filter to be removed.
3 Release the Filter (PN P9646-A) from the Line by rotating the Twist
Lock Fitting.
4 Remove the filter from the Carriage by sliding it out of the clip
securing it to the Solenoid Plate.
T he filter sho uld be p laced in a con tainer to co llec t any ink o r solven t
spillag e.
5 Install a new filter into the Filter Holder and connect the tubing at the
Twist Lock Fittings.
You sh ou ld e nsure th at the arro w on th e filter is p oin ting in th e directio n
o f the S eco n d a ry Ink Tan k .
6 Turn on the printer.
7 Check for leaks and ensure that there is air flow into the Secondary
Ink Tank and solvent flow through the jets.

Cleaning the Prim ary Ink Tank Filters

T he P rim ary Ink Tank F ilte rs req uire cleaning o r ch ang ing o n a yea rly
basis. A filter th at bec om es p lu gg ed slow s ink p um p rates and ca n cause
a "C heck F ilter" e rror.
T he filter co nsists o f a m esh bag (rectan gu lar) that is p ressed o nto th e
end of the ink p ick up tub e. It rests at th e bo tto m o f the P rim ary In k Tan k
(see F igu re 7-5). T his filter can be clean ed in solv ent and reused or it can
be replaced.

7-10 C hapter 7
 Filter

Figure 7-5 Primary Ink Tank Filter

Cleaning the Ink Level Sensors

In k L eve l S e nsors are lo cate d in the to p section o f th e S e con dary In k
Tan ks. O ccasiona lly, th e float an d shaft of th e Ink L evel S en sors w ill
collect ink . A s the in k d ries, flo at m ov em en t c an b e restricted, w hich
m ay affe ct th e sen sor ’s ab ility to d e tect low an d h ig h ink co n d ition s.
To av oid in k detection p ro ble m s, rem o ve and clean the Ink L ev el
S en so rs. Vu tek recom m en ds th at th is b e d o n e o n a m o n th ly b asis.

To rem ove an d clean th e In k L evel S en sor, d o th e follow in g:

1 Remove the hoses from the top of the Secondary Ink Tank.
2 Remove the screws securing the Secondary Ink Tank Cover and lift
the Cover off the Ink Tank.
3 Remove the e Retaining Clip and slide the Float off the Shaft.
4 Clean the Ink Level Sensors with lint-free cloth and UltraVu Head
Cleaning Fluid. ensure the Float Assembly can move freely. Wipe
clean using a lint free cloth.
N o te: V U T E k recom m en ds th at a sp are set of Ink L evel S ensors be
ava ilable to insta ll w h ile o ne set is b ein g clea ned .
5 Place Float onto the Shaft as before and attach Retaining Clip.
Ensure the Cover O-ring is in place and reinstall the Cover onto the
Secondary Ink Tank.

M aintenance 7-11
 Cleaning the Secondary Ink Tanks

To clean the S econd ary Ink Tan ks, do th e follow in g:

1 Remove the Secondary Ink Tank Cover as described above.
2 Disconnect all hoses and remove the tank.
3 Clean the tank with UltraVu Head Cleaning Fluid.
4 Reinstall the tank and reconnect the hoses
5 Reinstall the Secondary Ink Tank Cover as described above.

Adjusting the Edge Detector

T he E dg e D etector m ay n eed to b e readjuste d fo r som e v in yl m aterials.
T he E dg e D ete cto r is attached to th e left side of the C arriag e (see F igu re
7 -6 ). O n th e fro n t o f the d e tecto r there is a ro w o f L E D ’s lab eled 0
th ro u g h 1 0 , th e O utpu t L E D , and an o p e n in g for the S en sitiv ity
A d ju stm ent S crew.

Sensitivity
Screw

Carriage
Edge Detector

Figure 7-6 Edge Detector Adjustment

To adju st th e sen sor level, you w ill n eed to p erform th e step s b elow :
1 Enter the Diagnostic Menu by pressing Scroll ⇒ Scroll ⇒ ↑.
T he P rinter S tatus W ind ow w ill app ear (see F igu re 7-7).

7-12 C hapter 7
 Figure 7-7 Printer Status Window

2 Select the Printer Setup Tab at the top of the screen.

T he P rint O ptio n s W in d o w w ill ap p ea r (see F ig ure 7 -8 ).

Figure 7-8 Print Options Window

3 Select the Systems Tests Tab at the top of the screen.

M aintenance 7-13
 T he S yste m s Tests W in do w w ill ap pea r (see F ig ure 7-9).

Figure 7-9 System Tests Window

4 With material loaded onto printer, use the Move Carriage Commands
to move the Carriage to the right until the detector is on the material.
5 Adjust the Sensitivity Screw until LED#9 and LED#10 on the Detector
are on. Now move the Carriage until the detector is over the Platen;
the LED should be off scale (i.e., just below 0).
6 Move the Carriage to the right and verify readings along the length of
the material.
7 Move the Carriage back and forth across the material to check that
the Edge Detector is always detecting material.
8 Exit the Diagnostic Menu and return to normal printer operation.

Adjusting the O ptical Encoder Head Gap

T he E nc o d e r R ead er H ead g ap h as b ee n set at th e fac to ry, so u n d er
no rm al co nd ition s it do es n ot n eed to be adjusted. O n those rare tim es
th at it do es need ed to b e adjusted , V U T E k has su pp lied th e prop er g aug e
and proced ure to m ake the adjustm en t.

To ad ju st th e h ead gap , d o the follow in g:

1 Locate the Encoder Head (see Figure 7-10).

7-14 C hapter 7
 Head

S trip

Figure 7-10 Optical Encoder Head and Strip

2 Loosen the two Phillips screws securing the Optical Encoder Head.
3 Insert the VUTEk Feeler Gauge between the head and the optical
Encoder Strip that runs along the top of the Carriage Rail. A plastic
feeler gauge (0.045" - 0.050") is shipped with every machine.
4 Adjust the Encoder Head so that the gauge fits snugly between it and
the Encoder Strip.
5 Tighten the two Phillips screws.
6 Move the Carriage Assembly along the length of the Encoder Strip to
ensure that the Head does not bind with the strip.
7 If binding occurs, recheck the gap.
8 Repeat steps 1 through 6 as necessary to ensure that the Optical
Encoder Head can move freely along the Encoder Strip.

Maintenance Chart
V U T E k re com m en d s that a sch e d u le b e fo llo w ed to insure m ain ten a n ce
tak es p lac e at ind icated in tervals red ucing d ow n tim e an d m a xim izin g
p rin t q u ality. C op y th e M ain ten an ce S ch e d u le (sh ow n b elow ) and p ost
it o n or near you r p rinter.

M aintenance 7-15
 Table 7-1 UltraVu 3360 Maintenance Schedule

Frequency Procedure

After printing each segm ent Clean the surface of the Jet Packs with solvent.
Recover lost jets.

Every 8 hours Oil the rails.

D aily Check the water trap and filter on the incoming Air Supply Sys-
tem to the printer. Empty or replace as necessary.
Check Waste Tank
Clean both Front and Back Pinch Rollers with UltraVu Head
Cleaning Fluid. Roller surfaces should feel slightly tacky.

W eekly Clean or replace Carriage Fan Filter.

M onthly Carriage Plate.

Clean Secondary Ink Tanks.
Clean Secondary Ink Tank Sensors.
Clean Edge Detector Lens.
Check tension of the Carriage Drive Belt.

Q uarterly Replace Ink Supply Line Filters on the Carriage

Biannually Remove dust from DC Power Supply.

Annually Replace solvent and air filters on the Carriage.

Clean or replace the Primary Ink Tank Filters.

7-16 C hapter 7
 Chapter 8
Installation
••••••

Purpose
T his ch apter p ro vid es im po rtant installation inform ation, w h ich the
custom er sh ould review. T h e initial in stallation an d testing of the
U ltraVu 33 60 D igital P rin tin g S ystem w ill b e con ducted b y an
autho rized V U T E k representative to en sure tha t the eq uipm ent is
fu nctio nin g to sp ecifica tio n.
T he in fo rm atio n presented in this ch apter is in ten ded to serve as a
plann ing aid fo r the installation of th e system o r if th e system is m ove d
to a d iffe ren t lo cation.

Site Preparation
In order to ensu re a tim ely an d succ essful installatio n yo u sho uld
th o ro u g h ly re v ie w y o u r U ltra Vu 33 60 P re-Insta llation G uide an d
Su rvey and this ch apter prio r to the arriva l of the system . T he facility
th at w ill h ou se the prin ter shou ld b e “U ltraVu 33 60 R eady ”. A ll asp ects
such a s sub con tracto r sch edu lin g sho uld be do ne b efo re th e system 's
arriv al. E ach sub con tracto r m ust com p lete th e req uired w ork before the
syste m in stall date.

Space Requirem ents and Dim ensions

T his section d eta ils th e reco m m en ded sp ace req uirem en ts and the actu al
prin ter d im en sion s o f th e U ltraVu 336 0 prin ters.
T he U ltraVu 33 60 has floo r space req uirem ents of 25 ’ x 20 ’ (7 .6 m x 6 .1
m ). In ad ditio n yo u sho uld allow sp ace fo r th e rem o val an d drying o f
im ag es. T h is w ill requ ire an u no bstructed area of 40 ’ x 20 ’ (12.2 m x 6 .1
m ), preferab ly located in front o f the prin ter.
N o te: F o r cu sto m ers w ho purcha se a R ear U n w in der A ssem b ly,
ad ditio na l space sh ou ld b e allotted a t th e rea r o f th e prin ter to allow for
op erator m ovem en t an d fo r the sto rage o f extra rolls.

Installation 8-1
 T he U ltraVu 33 60 h as these d im ensions (see F igu re 4-1):
H eigh t 62 inch es (1 60 cm )
L eng th 23 0 in ches (590 cm )
D ep th 50 inch es (1 27 cm ) w ithou t I/O o ption s
95 inch es (2 40 cm ) w ith I/O op tions
W eig ht 56 00 lbs (2 .5 5 M etric Ton s)

62" (160 cm)

20-38" (51-96 cm)

130" (330 cm)

"230" (590 cm)

50" (127 cm)

Figure 8-1 UltraVu 3360 Digital Printing System

8-2 C hapter 8
Environm ent
T he U ltraVu 33 60 printers o perate b est in a co ntro lled env ironm en t. T he
ro om sho uld be clean , d ust-free , and m a intain a sta ble tem peratu re
betw een 68 °F and 85 °F (2 0°C an d 29 °C ). T he p rinte r sho uld n o t b e
in stalled ne ar viny l seam w eld in g equ ip m en t or any o th er sou rc es o f
stron g R ad io F req u en cy In terfe ren ce (R F I). T he flo o r sh o u ld b e e asy to
clea n and sh ou ld n ot ge nerate d ust or static electricity. It is also
im po rtant that the roo m h ave neu tral gray co lo rs and be equ ip ped w ith
p u re w hite (d aylig h t) lig htin g . T he n eu tral g ra y colors an d d a y ligh t
lightin g w ill aid op erators a nd clien ts in ju dg ing color ac curacy.

Pow er Requirem ents

T he U ltraVu 33 60 p rinters ca n acce pt a 208 VA C , 4-W ire or 40 0 VA C ,
5-W ire, 50 /6 0 H z, electrical co nne ctio n. T he U ltraVu 3 36 0 has a curren t
re quirem en t of 40 A m ps to p ro perly o perate. T he to tal p ow er
con su m p tio n is less tha n 1 8 K W . F ig ure 8 -3 sh o w s the req u ired
elec trical co nn ection an d con figu ratio n. P lease note U S and C anad ian
custom ers m ust use a 3-P h ase D E LTA (4 -W ire) co nfig uratio n; all oth ers
m ust use a 3 -P hase W Y E (5 -W ire).
T he A C po w er circuit m ust b e w ired w ith an in dep end ent circ uit breaker
and circu it g ro u n d (co m p u ter g rade) tha t is iso lated from o th er
equ ip m e nt. P ow e r sho uld not be suscep tib le to voltag e fluctu ation s.
N o te: In areas w ith u nsta ble p ow er so urces, it is reco m m ended th at a
P ow er C on dition in g System (P C S ) w ith a cap acity of 6 K VA be insta lled
to the ’electron ics’ pha se of the electrica l system .

Installation 8-3
 3 Phase W YE
European Configuration

PH 1-A1
L1 PH 1-B1
PH 1-A2
240V PH 1-B2
L1
L2 PH 2-A
PH 2-B
400V
L3 P H 3-A
1 P H 3-B

L3 L2
240V 240V N
GND
GND
GND GND
GND

3 P hase D istribution
B lock

3 Phase DELTA
North Am erican Configuration

PH 1-A1
L1 PH 1-B1
PH 1-A2
PH 1-B2
L1 L2
PH 2-A
PH 2-B
208V 208V
L3 PH 3-A
PH 3-B
L3 L2
208V N N /C
GND
GND
GND GND
GND

3 P hase D istribution
B lock

P H 1-A 1/B 1 to C ontactor #1 to B reaker B 2 & B 3 (S ervo's/P re-H eater/D ryer #1)

P H 1-A 2/B 2 to B reaker B 1 to C P U S upplies

P H 2-A /B to B reaker B 6 to C ontactor #2 (IR H eater/D ryer #2)

P H 3-A /B to B reaker B 7 to C ontactor #3 (IR H eater/D ryer #3)

Figure 8-3 3-Phase Electrical Configurations

8-4 C hapter 8
Air Requirem ents
T he U ltraVu 33 60 p rinter do es not need large vo lu m e s o f com p ressed
air, how eve r som e air is req uired to driv e the p inc h ro lle r cylin ders.
S ince these c ylind ers are activated an d d e-ac tiv ated w ith b ursts of air, a
con tinuo us vo lu m e o f air is no t need ed. A com p resso r th at can su pp ly
80 p si (1 50 p si, m ax ) at 4 cfm is rec om m end ed. To en sure c ylind er
lo nge vity th e air sh ou ld b e rela tiv ely d ry, ty pically th e a ir u sed w ith
pn eum atic equ ipm en t is adeq uate. T h e air co nne ctio n (loca ted at rear o f
m achine) has a ¼ ” (6 .3 m m ) m ale fitting . A basic w a ter and oil filtration
syste m is sho w n b elo w (see F ig u re 8 -4 ).

To
Printer

Figure 8-4 Basic Water and Oil Filtration System

N o te: If yo u do n ot a lready h ave co m p ressed a ir, a sm a ll p orta ble u nit

cap ab le of the ab ove p ressure an d cap acity w ill be satisfacto ry.

Prepress Requirem ents

UltraVu Workstation
T he U ltraVu W orkstatio n for the prin ter con sists of a P C , ru nn ing the
W ind ow s N T O pe rating S y stem and the U ltraVu P rinte r C o ntrol
S oftw a re. T he system is set u p to allo w file h a n d lin g to o ccur d u rin g
p rin tin g . T his p e rm its im age files to b e b atch ed tog eth er an d allow s
co n tin u o u s p rin tin g to o ccu r.
T he system is p ro vided w ith a 1 00 B ase T n etw ork card th at re quires
"C ateg o ry 5 " c ab ling to co n n ect it to an existin g W in d o w s N T n etw o rk .

Installation 8-5
 ColorBurst RIP Workstation (optional)
A seco nd o ption al W ind ow s N T W orkstatio n (rem ote) is av aila ble for
ho stin g th e C olorB urst R aster Im a ge P ro cessor (R IP ). W h en a secon d
w o rk station is u sed to ru n C olorB u rst, th e C olorB urst w o rk station is
no rm ally co nne cted to th e printer ’s U ltraVu W orksta tio n b y a p eer-to -
p eer n etw o rk . Im a g e files m ay b e tran sferred o v er th e n etw o rk o r b y
m eans of the C olo rB urst and U ltraVu w orksta tio n JA Z driv es.

Im age Preparation Softw are

T he C o lo rB u rst so ftw are is prov ide d to p rep are im a ges fo r p rinting .
C o lorB u rst re sides on a stand alon e R IP w orkstatio n. S ee C hap ter 5 , R IP
S tation , an d th e C olo rB urst U ser ’s M an ua l fo r m ore details.

Installation Procedures
T his sectio n describ es im portan t in stallation p ro cedu res that w ill be
re quired shou ld the prin ter be m ov ed.

Leveling the Printer

T he U ltraVu 33 60 D ig ita l P rin tin g S ystem n eeds to b e lev el fo r b est
perform an ce. O n ce th e printer is m o ved into p lace, it is critic al th at th e
prin ter be lev eled fro m fron t to b ack. L ev eling w ill elim inate an y tw ist
in th e carria ge rails and m aterial ro lle rs that m ay oc cur from an un even
floo r.

To level th e p rin ter d o th e follow in g:

1 Locate the two precision bubble levels that are mounted at the rear
of the printer above the Back Pinch Rollers (see Figure 8-5.
T hese le vel indicato rs are loc ated o n each en d of th e p rinter fram e.

8-6 C hapter 8
 Level

Figure 8-5 Bubble Level

2 Adjust the front and rear legs appropriately until both bubbles
indicate a level condition.
T he ad justable legs requ ire a 7 /8” (22 m m ) w re nch to adjust.

Installation 8-7
8-8 C hapter 8
 Chapter 9
Troubleshooting
••••••

Overview
T his ch apter p ro vid es so m e c orrectiv e a ctio ns to take w hen
tro u b le sh oo tin g th e U ltraVu 3 3 6 0 . In ad d itio n to the tro ub lesh o o ting
charts fou nd in the ch apter, y ou ’ll fin d a nu m b er o f electrical a nd
m echan ical draw ings of critical system co m pon ents. You m a y w an t to
re fer to th em w he n tro u b lesh oo tin g .
C a u tion : It is o f the u tm ost im po rtan ce th at a ll po w er to the C a rriag e
be rem o ved before a ny servicin g occu rs. D iscon nectin g an y conn ecto r
or m o du le on the C arria ge w ith p ow er p resen t w ill perm an ently da m a ge
th e P rint H ead s a nd o ther C a rriag e com po nents. Test P a ttern #1 ca n be
used to determ ine if the P rin t H ea ds are dam ag ed.

Troubleshooting Checklist
You m ay h av e p rinte r o p era tio n , p rint q u a lity, o r p rin ter
com m un icatio n s p ro b lem s a t som e tim e d u rin g the life o f y o u r p rinter.
It is easy to find m ost o f th e errors an d con sequ ently n ot de lay op eratio n
of the p rinte r fo r v ery lon g.

B asic trou b lesh ooting step s for you r prin ter are as follow s:
1 Clean all printer components as described in Chapter 7,
"Maintenance".
2 Check all electrical and cable connections within the Carriage
Assembly and Electrical Compartment.
3 If cleaning the printer and checking the connections does not solve
the problem, use the following tables to locate the symptom. Follow
the appropriate solution in the table to fix your problem.
If yo u rec eive an error m e ssag e on the P rinte r C o ntroller W orkstatio n,
re fer to Tab les 9-1, 9-2, and 9-3 fo r a list of error m essag es an d th eir
po ssible so lu tio ns.

Troubleshooting 9-1
 If th e p ro blem p ersists, co ntact yo ur V U T E k P rod uct S u ppo rt
R ep resen tative :
In the U .S . and C anad a 1.6 03.2 79 .4 63 5
If yo ur are an in terna tio nal cu sto m e r, con tact y ou r lo cal V U T E k
re presenta tiv e.

Entering the Printer Firm ware

To enter th e P rinter F irm w are, p erform the follow in g step s:

1 From the keyboard, press: Scroll Lock ⇒ Scroll Lock ⇒ ↑
T his co nn ects th e M on ito r, K eyb oard, and M ouse to the P rinter
C o ntroller.
N o te: A lterna tively, you ca n press the C h an nel B u tto n. T h e C ha nn el
B utton is loca ted beneath the E lectrical C o m p artm ents To p A ccess
C o ver o n th e righ t sid e o f th e U ltraVu 3 360 (see F ig ure 9 -1 ). You w ill
need to rem o ve this co ver.

C hannel
Button

Figure 9-1 Printer-Workstation Switch

2 Press Scroll ⇒ Scroll ⇒ ↑ to enter the printer Firmware

(see Figure 9-2).
N o rm al prin ter o peration s are su sp end ed w h en th e prin ter is sw itch ed to
th e p rinter F irm w are. T h e firm w a re’s fun ctions are describ ed on the
pag es that fo llo w.
Caution: T he printer Firmware is intend ed to be u sed by trained F ield
Service E ng ineers o nly. P lea se b e aw a re th at u sing this m od e w ill
disable a ll p rinter sa fety featu res. Im pro per use of the fun ction s w ith in
th is m o de can rend er the P rin ter in op erab le.

9-2 C hapter 9
Printer Status
D ispla ys valu able troub lesh oo tin g in fo rm ation abo ut th e statu s of the
prin ter du ring b oo tu p an d op eratio n (see F ig ure 9-2). T his w in do w also
display s a ny erro r sy stem m essag es a s they o ccur.

Figure 9-2 Printer Firmware - Printer Status Window

Troubleshooting 9-3
 Error Status
T his screen d isplays th e sy stem errors as they o ccu r (se e F ig ure 9-3).
B o th a n alpha num eric cod e and a m essage app ear w ill ap pea r. E rrors are
sorted an d classified acco rd ing to th e d egree of sev erity : W arn ing , E rro r,
or C ritical E rror.

Figure 9-3 Printer Firmware - Error Status Window

Print Options
T he P rint O ption s W indo w sho w s th e optio n selected by the o perato r
th ro ugh the U ltraVu S oftw are. T h e w in do w is useful w hen ever a system
erro r m essage oc curs (see F igu re 9 -4 ).
20 ips ... 60 ips is th e setting for C arriag e speed in in ches p er seco nd.
20 ips Alignm ent ... 60 ips Alignm ent is th e X S erv o ad justm e nt th at is
set w h en run nin g Test 3 . T h e a d ju stm en ts a re p e rfo rm ed th ro u g h the
U ltraVu S o ftw are.
Ultra ... Enhanced ... Draft are the sam e prin ter m o des th at can b e
selected th ro ug h th e U ltraVu S o ftw are.
Left Edge... Right Edge ... W idth are user-d efined d ista nces w h en
placin g m edia o n th e print (e.g. left m argin, rig ht m arg in an d w idth ).
Step Distance the Y S erv o step size ad justm e nt th at is set w hen run ning
Test 5 . T he ad ju stm en t is p erfo rm ed thro u g h th e U ltraVu S o ftw are.

9-4 C hapter 9
Gear Ratio... F ... R is the ratio b etw ee n th e F ro n t and R ear S erv o s.

Figure 9-4 Printer Firmware - Print Options Window

Printer Setup
T he P rinter S etu p W in d o w sh o w s critical C arria g e p aram eters tha t are
preset at the fa cto ry. P aram eters that are v iew able or ch ang eab le throu gh
th is w in do w, inclu d e: w ee p and v acu u m co n tro l, spitu n e a n d fire p u lse
con trol, ch ann el selectio n, a nd m ech anic al assem bly offse ts. T h e
w ind ow is u sed to co nfig ure the C a rriag e A ssem bly fo r prin ting (see
F igu re 9 -5 ).
W eep Interval is th e am o un t of tim e (in seco nd s) allow ed to elapse
betw een W e ep P h ases. W eep in g preven ts in k from dryin g in the no zzles
and o n ly o cc u rs w hen the p rin ter is n o t in u se .
W eep Count is th e nu m b er o f tim e s the P rint H ead Jets are a llo w ed to
fire ink du ring a W eep P ha se. W ee pin g p rev ents in k fro m d ry in g in th e
no zzles an d on ly o ccurs w hen the p rinte r is no t in u se.
Vacuum Target is the am o u n t o f v ac u u m p e rm itted in th e C arria g e
Vacuu m L ines. T his va lue h as n o un its o f m easure.
Vacuum Reading is the am o un t of v acuu m m easu red in the C arriage
Vacuu m L ines. T his va lue h as n o un its o f m easure.
Vacuum Tim e-out d isplays th e se t value betw een vacu um
m easurem ents p erform ed by the Vacu um S ystem M o nitor.

Troubleshooting 9-5
 Vacuum O utput T his m easu res th e am oun t of vacu um con trol requ ired
to m ainta in a given Ven tu ri v acuu m level. Values ra nge b etw een 0 an d
1 0 0 % . It is a u se fu l too l for tro ub lesh o o ting the Vacu u m S y stem . F o r
exam p le, if Vac uum O u tp ut indicates 1 00% w hile a Ve ntu ri v acu um
re adin g m easures lo w, then a co m pon ent in th e Vacuu m S ystem is
prob ably be at fault.
c1...c8 are used to selec t w h ich ch ann els w ill b e enab led fo r op era tio n.
Edge Detector O ffset is th e m e chan ical assem b ly d istan ce betw een Je t
H ea d 1 and the C a rriag e E d ge D etector.
Lim it Switch Offset is the m ec han ical assem bly d istan ce b etw een R ig ht
L im it S w itch (active po sition) an d the C arriag e w hen th e C arriage is in
its cap ped positio n.
Spitune Count is the nu m ber o f tim es th e P rint H ead Jets are allow ed to
discharge ink into the Ink C ollection C on tain er w ith each p ass o f th e
C arriage. Ty pic al values are 1 , 2 ,....
Fire Pulse W idth is th e len gth of tim e an ele ctrical p ulse is allo w ed to
activate the individua l jets. T he size o f th e pu lse w idth d ete rm in es the
size of th e ink d ro plet discharg es fro m the je t.

Figure 9-5 Printer Firmware - Printer Setup Window

9-6 C hapter 9
Overrides
T he O verrides W in do w is used to o verride selected prin ter setting s. T h e
ov errid es are o ften fou nd to be useful w h ene ver system error m essag es
occu r (see F igu re 9-6 ).
Vacuum Control O verride is u se d to circu m v en t th e Vac u u m C o n tro ls
to allo w the p rinter to op erate w ith th e Vacuu m S ystem in a n ope n loo p
state.
Capper O verride is used to circum v ent the C ap per C ontro ls to allow the
prin ter to op erate w ith the C ap per in th e up p ositio n.
Paper Out Override is used to circum v ent the P aper O u t C on trols to
allow the prin ter to o perate w ith the P aper D etecto r disabled.
Pinch O verride is used to circu m ven t the P in ch C o ntro ls to allow the
prin ter to op erate w ith the P inc h R ollers d isab led .
M ax M edia M ode O verride is u se d to circu m ven t th e M axim u m M edia
M o de C o ntrols to allow the prin ter to o perate w ith the M e dia E n cod er
d isab le d .

Figure 9-6 Printer Firmware - Overrides Window

Diagnostic Aids
T h e D iagn ostic A id s W indo w prov id es v alu able troub lesh oo tin g
in fo rm ation abou t th e vario us C arriage param ete rs (see F ig ure 9-7).

Troubleshooting 9-7
 Pum ps c1 ... c8 in dic ate w h en th e chan nel p um p s are pu m p in g in k
from th e P rim ary Tan ks lo cated in th e In k C ab ine t to the S econ dary
Tan ks lo cated on the C arria ge. W h en p um ping o ccu rs, an indicato r w ill
be illu m inated.
Fuses c1 ... c8 indicate s w hether e ach cha nne l’s fuse is blo w n or n ot.
V c1 ... c8 in dicates P rint H ead vo ltage for ea ch chan nel. Typical
vo lta ge values are 1 00 ±15 V dc.
°F c1 ... c8 ind icates P rin t H ead tem peratu re for each ch ann el. Typ ical
tem p erature values are 8 4± 2 °F.
Rotary Sw itch in dica tes th e p ositio n of the F un ction S ele ctor S w itch.
Push Buttons indicate s w hen a p ush b utton o n th e C on trol P ane l is
active or no t.
Carriage Tem p ind icates inte rn al C arriage te m p erature.
Carriage Position in dicates th e positio n of th e C arriag e relative to the
left lim it po sition in in ches.

Figure 9-7 Printer Firmware - Diagnostic Aids Window

System Tests
T he S yste m Te sts a re useful tests th at can b e perfo rm ed o n th e printer
fo r the pu rp ose of troub lesh oo tin g (see F ig ure 9-8).

9-8 C hapter 9
Interface C ard M em ory Test p erform s a p ass / fail test on the Interface
C ard’s M em o ry.
Pixel C ard M em ory Test p erform s a p ass / fail test on the P ix el C ard ’s
M em o ry.
M em ory Transfer Speed Test perform s a test that m easures the data
transfer rates betw een Pixel and Interface B oard m em ories.
Carriage Shuttle Test m ov es th e C arriage fully to the rig ht and fu lly to
th e left before com in g to rest in its H om e positio n.
M ove Carriage Com m ands <16" ... 16"> are con trols the op erator can
use to positio n th e C arriage alo ng the rail. T he b utton s w ill m o ve th e
C arriag e 4 -, 8 -, o r 1 6 " to the rig ht o r left o f its cu rrent p o sitio n .
Edge Detector Status indicate s w hether the E dg e D etecto r is o n
(illum in ated ) or off (no t illum inate d).
Paper Out Status in dicates w h eth er the P aper O u t D etecto r is on
(illum in ated ) or off (no t illum inate d).

Figure 9-8 printer Firmware - System Tests Window

Troubleshooting 9-9
 Drive Tuning
T he D riv e Tu ning W in do w is no t fo r cu stom er use. It m ust b e used b y
V U T E k S upp ort E ng in eers o nly (see F igu re 9 -9 ).
C a u tion : A lterin g th e valu es of pa ram eters on this screen cou ld severely
da m a ge you r p rinter. D a m a ge to the m a chine cau sed as a resu lt o f usin g
setting s o th er tha n th ose set by th e fa ctory o r a q ua lified V U T E k
E ng ineer m ay vo id yo ur w arra nty.

ST R T
NO

E ER
FO
US OM
CU

Figure 9-9 printer Firmware - Drive Tuning Window

9-10 C hapter 9
Printer Controller M essage Tables

Table 9-1 Warning Messages

Warning Explanation Cause / Solution

C1 Ink Low The Primary Ink Tank for this Needs ink. Add ink.
color is low.

C2 Ink Low The Primary Ink Tank for this Needs ink. Add ink.
color is low.

C3 Ink Low The Primary Ink Tank for this Needs ink. Add ink.
color is low.

C4 Ink Low The Primary Ink Tank for this Needs ink. Add ink.
color is low.

C5 Ink Low The Primary Ink Tank for this Needs ink. Add ink.
color is low.

C6 Ink Low The Primary Ink Tank for this Needs ink. Add ink.
color is low.

C7 Ink Low The Primary Ink Tank for this Needs ink. Add ink.
color is low.

C8 Ink Low The Primary Ink Tank for this Needs ink. Add ink.
color is low.

Solvent Can Low The Primary Solvent Tank is Needs solvent. Add solvent.
low.

Waste Can Full The Waste Tank is full and Empty Waste Tank.
needs to be emptied.

C1 Fill Error The Secondary Ink Tank for Filter is plugged or pump is not working
this color was not filled in the at full capacity. Replace filter and/or
allotted time. pump as needed.

C2 Fill Error The Secondary Ink Tank for Filter is plugged or pump is not working
this color was not filled in the at full capacity. Replace filter and/or
allotted time. pump as needed.

C3 Fill Error The Secondary Ink Tank for Filter is plugged or pump is not working
this color was not filled in the at full capacity. Replace filter and/or
allotted time. pump as needed.

C4 Fill Error The Secondary Ink Tank for Filter is plugged or pump is not working
this color was not filled in the at full capacity. Replace filter and/or
allotted time. pump as needed.

C5 Fill Error The Secondary Ink Tank for Filter is plugged or pump is not working
this color was not filled in the at full capacity. Replace filter and/or
allotted time. pump as needed.

Troubleshooting 9-11
 Table 9-1 Warning Messages

Warning Explanation Cause / Solution

C6 Fill Error The Secondary Ink Tank for Filter is plugged or pump is not working
this color was not filled in the at full capacity. Replace filter and/or
allotted time. pump as needed.

C7 Fill Error The Secondary Ink Tank for Filter is plugged or pump is not working
this color was not filled in the at full capacity. Replace filter and/or
allotted time. pump as needed.

C8 Fill Error The Secondary Ink Tank for Filter is plugged or pump is not working
this color was not filled in the at full capacity. Replace filter and/or
allotted time. pump as needed.

Truncated Line The data sent to the printer Error in UltraVu Software
was longer than the print me-
dia could accommodate. The
line was truncated to fit me-
dia.

E-Stop Active One of the Emergency Stop Turn to release button.

Buttons has been pushed.

Servo Drive Error An error has occurred in one The drive status command has detect-
of the servo drives. ed an internal error on the drive. Reset
system.

Front Pinch Error The pinch failed to close with- Obstruction in the pinch.
in the allotted time. Remove obstruction.

Rear Pinch Error The pinch failed to close with- Obstruction in the pinch.
in the allotted time. Remove obstruction.

Servo Drive Comm. The servo drive failed to com- Not critical unless problem persists.
Error municate with the firmware.

9-12 C hapter 9
 Table 9-2 Critical Error Messages

Critical Error Explanation Cause / Solution

Comm. Setup Failed The firmware failed to config- Defective Motherboard.

ure the comm. ports on initial-
ization.

Interface Card Not The firmware failed to locate Card not installed or not seated
Found the Interface Card on initial- properly
ization.

Pixel Card A Not The firmware failed to locate Card not installed or not seated
Found Pixel Card A on initialization. properly

Pixel Card B Not The firmware failed to locate Card not installed or not seated
Found Pixel Card B on initialization. properly

PCI Configuration The firmware received an Defective Motherboard or PCI bus

Error error while attempting to con- short circuited.
figure the PCI bus on the
Motherboard during initializa-
tion.

Encoder Feedback The Linear Encoder and the Defective Encoder or loose cable.
Error Carriage Drive Encoder have
failed to synchronize.

Carriage Shift Error The data received from the Loose Cable.
Carriage has encountered a
framing error.

Default File Not The "default.dat" file was not Drive failure.
Found found on the D-Drive after
initialization.

Vacuum Overflow The Vacuum Overflow Tank Empty the Overflow Tank.
Error is full. Check all Secondary Ink Tanks for
"Ink High" condition; empty tanks as
needed.

Troubleshooting 9-13
 Table 9-3 Error Messages

Error Explanation Cause / Solution

C1 Ink Overflow The Secondary Ink Tank 1. An over vacuum condition may
for this color has over- have removed the ink from the
flowed. head and forced it into the tank.
2. The pump did not stop filling
when it should have stopped.
Check the vacuum control and
pumps and sensors.

C2 Ink Overflow Same as C1 Ink Overflow Same as C1 Ink Overflow above.

above.

C3 Ink Overflow Same as C1 Ink Overflow Same as C1 Ink Overflow above.

above.

C4 Ink Overflow Same as C1 Ink Overflow Same as C1 Ink Overflow above.

above.

C5 Ink Overflow Same as C1 Ink Overflow Same as C1 Ink Overflow above.

above.

C6 Ink Overflow Same as C1 Ink Overflow Same as C1 Ink Overflow above.

above.

C7 Ink Overflow Same as C1 Ink Overflow Same as C1 Ink Overflow above.

above.

C8 Ink Overflow Same as C1 Ink Overflow Same as C1 Ink Overflow above.

above.

Comm. Test Failed The Communications Port The mother board may be defec-
Loop Test has failed. tive. Replace, if necessary

Start Print Position The "Start of Print" position Linear Encoder is not working.
Error was never reached while
attempting to print a line.

Y Servo Timeout Drive did not complete a Drive has errors. Reboot the sys-
move in the allotted time. tem.

X Servo Timeout Drive did not complete a Drive has errors. Reboot the sys-
move in the allotted time. tem.

Paper Out Paper was not detected on Paper is torn or paper supply has
the Platen or Feed Roll. been exhausted.

Scan Platen Failed Scan of Platen failed to de- No paper was found. Load the pa-
tect the print media. per; clean the Edge Detector; or
adjust sensitivity of the Edge De-
tector.

9-14 C hapter 9
 Table 9-3 Error Messages

Error Explanation Cause / Solution

Blown Jet Driver The Jet Driver Board has Fuses must be replaced by ser-
Fuse blown fuses. vice technician.

Vacuum Out Of The Vacuum Control Loop Check the Vacuum Control regu-
Range has failed to control the lator. Replace if necessary. Reset
system vacuum and has the printer.
been disabled.

Limit Switch Failure At least one of the Carriage Jammed or broken Limit Switch.
Limit Switches has failed. Limit Switch wiring may be at
fault.

Capper Down Failure Capper Sensor did not de- Capper is jammed or Capper Sen-
tect Capper in the down sor may be at fault.Check Air
position when ordered to Pressure Regulator Setting.
do so.

Comm Lost on X Drive Communications between The COM Port or Servo Controller
Servo Controller and COM may be defective.
Port lost.

Comm Lost on Y Drive Communications between The COM Port or Servo Controller
Servo Controller and COM may be defective.
Port lost.

Drive-Encoder Sync Linear Encoder and X- Clean and/or set read head.
Error Drive Encoder do not Controller Board and/or X-Driver
agree. Motor may be defective.

Paper Out on Roll No paper detected. Install new paper roll or adjust
sensitivity.

Drive Error Generic Error. Servo Motor and/or Controller

may be defective.

Troubleshooting 9-15
9-16
C hapter 9
UltraVu 3360 Electrical Cabinet

F igure 9-1 0 E lectrical C ab inet (Top view )

 UltraVu 3360 Electrical Cabinet

Troubleshooting
F igu re 9-11 E lectrical C abin et (F ron t view )

9-17
9-18
C hapter 9
UltraVu 3360 Electrical Cabinet

Insert - Power Distribution System Detail View

F ig u re 9 -1 2 E lectrica l C a b in et S h o w in g P o w er S ystem D eta ils (F ro n t view )

Printer Controller System Overview
T he U ltraVu 33 60 D ig ita l P rin tin g S ystem u se s V xW o rk s b y W ind
R iv er S ystem s as th e op eratin g system for the P rinte r C o ntroller
F irm w are. T h e F irm w are con trols all p rinter fun ctio ns an d m ana ges th e
d ata transfer b e tw e en it an d th e U ltra Vu S o ftw are.
N o te: V xWorks is no t accessible to th e u ser.

F ig ure 9-13 C ontroller B oa rd B lock D ia gra m

Troubleshooting 9-19
9-20
C hapter 9
Pow er System O verview

F igu re 9 -14 P ow er System O verview

UltraVu Workstation Overview
T he U ltraVu 33 60 D ig ita l P rin tin g S ystem inclu des a W ind ow s N T
W orkstatio n that fu nctio ns as the file m anag er and user in terface for th e
prin ter. T he cu stom er has th e o ption of u sin g a se cond W ind ow s N T -
based w o rk station that ca n be co nfigu re d as the stand alon e C olorB urst
R IP S tation . B oth w orkstations hav e id entical co nfig uratio ns, inclu ding
th e u se of a S ecu rity D ong le for the prop rietary so ftw are.
T he W orkstation C o ntro lle r in terfac es w ith:
• Vid e o In terfac e M od ule to allow d isplay o f N T W in d o w s an d
U ltraVu S o ftw are
• K ey bo ard /B all/M o use fo r softw are inp ut an d in teraction
• 1 0 0 B a se -T E th ern et n etw o rk c ard for p eer-to -p e er file tran sfer
fu nctio ns
• S C S I C on troller to intera ct w ith re m o vab le m edia an d C D -R O M fo r
file tran sfer a nd sto ra ge
• P C I Interface M o du le to tran sfer im age inform a tio n and com m and
fu nctio ns to P rinter C o ntro ller
• O n -b oard co ntroller to co ntrol the F lo pp y D isk and H ard D riv e for
o p era tin g syste m , app licatio n p ro gram an d d ata sto rage
• P arallel C om m un ication s P o rt (L PT ) – for D on gle atta chm ent and
com m un icatio n
N o te: T he U ltra Vu Wo rkstatio n an d th e C olo rB urst R IP S ta tio n
(o ption al) are con fig ured sim ila rly an d are typ ically co nnected a s a
netw ork for file tran sfer fun ction s.

Troubleshooting 9-21
UltraVu Control Unit and Printer Control Unit BIOS Values
T he U ltraVu C o ntrol U nit and the P rinter C o ntro l U n it u se iden tic al
C P U M o du les - th e S u per P 6 S B U M o th erb oard. T he B IO S values are
set differently an d are listed in Table 9 -4 (for inform ation p urpo se s
on ly).
C a u tion : It is very im p ortant tha t th e d ate is set correctly in th e
Wo rkstation C P U B IO S before the U ltra Vu progra m is run . A n in correct
da te in the B IO S va lu es m ay render the system ino pera ble.

9-22 C hapter 9
 Table 9-4 AMIBIOS Setup - Version 2.5
Super M icro P6SBU M otherboard

Standard Setup Workstation Printer Chipset Setup Workstation Printer

Advanced Setup

N ote: H ighlighted areas are to be changed from default settings

Troubleshooting 9-23
 Table 9-4 AMIBIOS Setup - Version 2.5 (Continued)
Super M icro P6SBU M otherboard

Power Management Setup Workstation Printer Peripheral Setup Workstation Printer

PCI/PnP Setup

Security

Utility

Default

N ote: H ighlighted areas are to be changed from default settings

9-24 C hapter 9
BIO S Beep Codes and M essages
D u ring the P O S T (P ow er-O n S elf-Te st) rou tin es, w hich are p erfo rm ed
each tim e th e sy stem is pow ered on , erro rs m ay o ccur.
N o n-fatal erro rs are tho se w hich, in m o st cases, allow the sy stem to
con tin u e the b o o t-u p p ro cess. T he erro r m essag es n o rm ally ap p ear o n
th e screen .
F atal errors are th ose w h ich w ill not allo w th e system to c ontin ue th e
bo ot-u p proced ure. If a fatal error o ccu rs, y ou sh ou ld co nsult w ith y ou r
syste m m an ufactu re r for po ssib le repairs. T he se fatal e rrors are usu ally
com m un icated th ro ug h a series o f au dible b eeps. T he nu m bers o n th e
fa tal erro r list, o n th e follow in g pag e, co rrespo nd to th e n um ber of b eeps
fo r the correspon ding error. A ll errors listed, w ith th e excep tion o f #8 ,
are fata l errors.

Troubleshooting 9-25
 Table 9-5 BIOS Error Beep Codes

9-26 C hapter 9
Table 9-6 BIOS Error Beep Messages

Troubleshooting 9-27
 Table 9-6 BIOS Error Beep Messages

9-28 C hapter 9
Table 9-7 BIOS Error Messages

Troubleshooting 9-29
 Table 9-7 BIOS Error Messages

9-30 C hapter 9
Printer Control Unit CPU Module: P7820-A
Super P6SBU Motherboard Cont...

Figure 9-15 Super P6SBU Motherboard Photo

Troubleshooting 9-31
 Super P6SBU Motherboard Continued

Figure 9-16 Super P6SBU Motherboard Layout

9-32 C hapter 9
Printer Controller Board: AA90206 (P9637-A)

Figure 9-17 Printer Controller Board

Troubleshooting 9-33
 Printer Controller Board Cont...
J2: To Motherboard J8: To J1 Front Control panel J12: From frame harness
1-RESET Cable - Cable – AA90184
2-GND 1-PBSELCT0 1- +5V
2-PBSELCT1 2-GND
J8: To J15 Pixel Bds. 3-PBSELCT2 3-C1CANLOW#
Cable - AA90077 4-PBSELCT3
1-GND 5-SELCT0 4-C2CANLOW#
2-MPIXELCLK1 6-SELCT1 5-C3CANLOW#
3-GND 7-SELCT2 6-C4CANLOW#
4-JSEL0 8-SELCT3 7-C5CANLOW#
5-GND 9-+12 8-C6CANLOW#
6-JSEL1 10-POWERSW# 9-SOLCANLOW#
7-GND 11-BKPNCHLT# 10-WASTEFUL#
8-JSEL2 12-RESETLT# 11-PAPROUT
9-GND 13-TSTLT# 12-NA
10-JSEL3 14-+12 13-C7CANLOW#
11-GND 15-ERRLT# 14- C8CANLOW#
12-JSEL4 16-FRPCHLT# 15- NA
13-GND 17-TNSIONLT# 16- GND
14-JSEL5 18-AUXLT# 17- +5V
15-GND 19-ONLINELIT# 18-FRPNCHSENSOR
16-JSEL6 20-RESETSW 19- +5v
17-GND 21-PBSELECT4R 20- BKPINCHSENSOR
18-JSEL7 22-+5 21- +5V
19-JSEL8 23-+5 22-CAPERDN#
20-MPRTACTIVE 24-GND 23- +12V
25-GND
J11: To J211 Carriage J12: CONT
Cable - AA90197 J5: To J38 power bd. 24- +5v
1-SHIFTCK+ Cable - 25- NA
2-JETOE*- 1-PUMPEN1 25-NA
3-SHIFTCK- 2-PUMPEN2
4-NA 3-PUMPEN3 J7: From Linear Encoder
5-SERLATCH+ 4-PUMPEN4 Cable – AA90197
6-NA 5-FRPINCHENB 1-ENCODEA+
7-SERLATCH- 6-BKPINCHENB 2-ENCODEA-
8-GND 7-CAPPERENB 3-ENCODEB+
9-JETOE*+ 8-AUXLTENB 4-ENCODEB-
9-TORQENB 5-INDEX+
J3: To U15 10-BEEPEREN# 6-INDEX-
PROGRAMMING PORT 11-200VINHB 7-NA
8-NA
J6: To U16 J5: CONT. 9-NA
PROGRAMMING PORT 12-ESTOP+12V 10- +5V
13-VCONTROL 11- +5V
J10: To J211 Carriage 14-AUTOSHUTDN# 12- +5v
Cable - AA90197 15-PWRBRDEN 13-GND
1-SRCLK+ 16-PUMPEN5 14-GND
2-RDDATA+ 17-PUMPEN6 15-GND
3-SRCLK- 18-CUTRTENB
4-RDDATA- 19-PUMPEN7 PS: To Printer & Workstation PSON
5-LDFROMSR+ 20-PUMPEN8 1-POWERSW#
6-EDGEDET+ 21-HTR-EN 2-GND
7-LDFROMSR- 22-NA 3-POWERSW# &
8-EDGEDET- 23-NA WORKSTAPWRSWD
9-LDINTSR+ 24-NA 4-WORKSTAPWR
10-NA 25- -12v
11-LDINTSR- 26-GND
12-KEY
13-WRDATA+
14-GND
15-WRDATA-
16-NA

9-34 C hapter 9
AGP Video Board: P9110-A

Figure 9-18 ATI Rage II C Graphics Accelerator

Troubleshooting 9-35
UltraVu Control Unit CPU Module: P7820-A

Super P6SBU Motherboard Cont...

F igu re 9-19 S u per P 6 SB U M o therb oa rd P h oto

9-36 C hapter 9
Super P6SBU Motherboard

Figure 9-20 Super P6SBU Motherboard Layout

Troubleshooting 9-37
PCI Interface Board: AA70175/AA70203

Figure 9-21 PCI Interface Board

9-38 C hapter 9
Pow er Board: AA90198 (P9621-A)

Servo
Enable
Jumpers

Figure 9-22 Power Board

Troubleshooting 9-39
Network Interface Card: P7398-A

Figure 9-23 Network Interface Board

9-40 C hapter 9
Carriage Interface Board: AA90203 (P9634-A)

Power Cable

Linear Encoder Cable

Vacuum Sensor Cable
Switch Settings

Data Cable

F igu re 9-2 4 C arria ge Interfa ce B oa rd

Troubleshooting 9-41
Carriage Backplane Board: AA90207 (P9638-A)

J1, J3, J4 To edge connector on Carriage

Interface Bd.

J2, J21 To edge connector on HV

Amplifier Bd.

J8, J9, J10, J11

J20, J25, J27, J28 1. INK/SLVNT (S2)
2. +24v
3. INK/WASTE (S1)
4. +24V
5. NA
6. NA
7. VAC (S3)
8. +24V
9. WASTE (S4)
10. +24V

J15, J16, J17, J18

J19, J22, J24, J26 1. INKLEVEL VOLTAGE
- 0V LOW
- 6V NORMAL
- 12V HIGH
2. RESISTOR
3. GND

J13 EDGE DETECTOR

J14 1. SOLVENT (S5)

2. +24V
3. NA
4. NA
5. NA
6. NA

J31 COVER

J32 +12v FAN

J33 OVERFLOW/CARRIAGE FAN

J34 +12v FAN

F igure 9--25 C arriage B ackplane B oard

9-42 C hapter 9
SCSI Adapter Board: P1530-B

AHA-2940AU

Figure 9-26 Adaptec PCI-to-UltraSCSI Host Adapter

Troubleshooting 9-43
 HV Am plifier Board: AA90205 (P9636-A)

F igu re 9-27 H V A m plifier B oard

J1, J21 ED G E C O N N EC TO R TO C AR R IAG E BAC KPLAN E BD.

J2 1. +132V
2. G N D
3. +12V
4. G N D
5. +132V
J10 TEST PO IN TS

9-44 C hapter 9
Pixel Board: AA90013

Figure 9-28 Pixel Board Layout

Troubleshooting 9-45
 Ink Draw Transfer Board: AA90199 (P9620)

Figure 9-29 Ink Transfer Board Layout

9-46 C hapter 9
Control Panel Board: AA90204 (P9635-A)

Figure 9-30 Control Panel Board Layout

Troubleshooting 9-47
Corrective Procedures

Rew riting Servo Param eters

Writing Parameters to the X Servo Controller (Carriage)

To rew rite th e Servo P aram eters, d o th e follow ing:

1 Remove the Servo Enable jumpers from the bottom of the Power
Board (see Figure 9-31).
T he P ow er B o ard is loc ated insid e th e top sectio n of the E le ctron ics
B o x. T h e jum p ers are on th e un derside o f th e bo ard .

Servo
Enable
Jumpers
T1,T2,T3

Figure 9-31Power Board Showing Jumpers

2 Remove the end of the Servo Cable from the Printer COM2 connector
and attach it to the Workstation COM2 connector (see Figure 9-32).

9-48 C hapter 9
 Printer COM2 Workstation COM2

Figure 9-32 Changing Cables To Electronics Box (top)

3 From the Windows NT Desktop

Select Start → Program s → B RU M aster
T he P ro gram m en u w ill d isplay (see F igure 9-32 ).

Figure 9-32 Selecting BRU Master

4 From the menu, click BRU Master.

T he m ain B R U M aster screen w ill d isplay w ith the B R U M aster Q u ick
S tart and D rive w ind ow s o pen (see F ig ure 9 -3 3).

Troubleshooting 9-49
 Figure 9-33 BRU Master Screen

5 Close the BRU Master Quick Start Window.

6 From the Drive Window, click OK.
T he D riv e S e lect W in do w w ill close and the D rive W in dow w ill op en
(see F ig ure 9-34 ).

Figure 9-34 Drive Window

7 From the Drive Window, select the Drive Setup icon.

9-50 C hapter 9
 T he D riv e S et-up W in do w w ill d isplay (see F ig ure 9-35 ).
N o te: If co m fa ilu re occurs set C om m u nication s\P C setu p\ C om 2 – 8
bits – 1 sto p bit – 19 20 0 – N o p arity

Figure 9-35 D rive S et U p W ind ow

8 Verify Drive and Motor Selection parameters are set as follows:

X-Drive: D rive Type = D D M 019X
M otor M odel = H -3016-N -H
Rear Y-Drive: D rive Type = D D M 019X
M otor M odel = H -3016-N -H
Front Y-Drive: D rive Type = D D M 019X
M otor M odel = H -3016-N -H
9 Close both the Drive Window and the Drive Setup Window.
10 From the BRU Master menu
Select File → Open → Progra~1 → Vutek → Tech → Servo
T his w ill o p e n the F ile O p en W in d o w (see F ig u re 9 -3 6).

Figure 9-36 File Open Window

Troubleshooting 9-51
 11 From the File Open Window, select carriage.par
Click OK.

12 Click

T his w ill o p en the D rive S elect W in d o w (see F ig u re 9 -3 7 ).

Figure 9-37 Drive Select Window

13 From the Drive Select Window, click OK.

T his w ill w rite the D riv e P aram ete rs to the D riv e C on troller. A dialo g
bo x w ill o pen an d displa y th e m essag e "T h e d rive w ill n ow b e reset to
utilize the selected m o to r ’s param eters" (see F igu re 9 -3 8).

Figure 9-38 Writing Drive Parameters

9-52 C hapter 9
14 From the dialog box, click OK.
T his w ill disp lay the m essage "P lease w ait ... resetting d rive."
15 Re-install the Servo Enable jumpers on the Power Board (see Figure
9-39).

Servo
Enable
Jumpers
T1,T2,T3

F ig ure 9 -3 9 P o w er B oa rd Sh ow in g Ju m pers
16 Remove the end of the Servo Cable from the Workstation COM2
connector and re-attach it to the Printer COM2 connector (see Figure
9-40).

Printer COM2 Workstation COM2

Figure 9-40 Changing Cables To Electronics Box (top)

17 From the BRU Master main menu, select File → Close.

Troubleshooting 9-53
 T his co nclud es the R ew ritin g S ervos P ara m eters P roced ure.

Writing Parameters to the Rear Y Servo Controller (Media)

To w rite param eters to the R ear Y S ervo C on troller, y ou w ill n eed to u se
th e preced ing proced ure "W ritin g P ara m e ters to the X S e rv o C o ntroller
(C arriag e)."

B efore you attem pt to u se th is p roced ure, ensu re you d o th e

follow in g:
1 Remove the Rear Y Servo Controller Cable from the Rear Y Servo
Controller Connector, J5 (see Figure 9-41).

Rear Y Servo C ontroller J5 X S ervo C ontroller J5

J5 J5

J5

Figure 9-41 Servo Controllers showing J5 Connector

2 Remove Cable Connector from the X Servo Controller, J5 and attach

it to the Rear Y Servo Controller Connector, J5 (see Figure 9-41).
3 Follow the procedure "W riting Param eters to the X Servo Controller
(Carriage)." In step 11, replace "carriage.par" with "media.par.". When
done, return all Servo Controller Cable connections to their original
positions.

X Servo Cable → X Servo Connector, J5

Rear Y Servo Cable → Rear Y Servo Connector, J5

9-54 C hapter 9
 Writing Parameters to the Front Y Servo Controller (Tension)
To w rite param ete rs to the F ro nt Y S ervo C on troller, y ou w ill n eed to
use th e preceding p ro ced ure "W riting P aram e ters to th e X S e rv o
C o ntroller (C arriag e)."

B efore you attem pt to u se th is p roced ure, ensu re you d o th e

follow in g:
1 Remove the Front Y Servo Controller Cable from the Front Y Servo
Controller Connector, J5 (see Figure 9-42).

Front Y Servo C ontroller J5 X S ervo C ontroller J5

J5 J5

J5

Figure 9-42 Servo Controllers showing J5 Connector

2 Remove Cable Connector from the X Servo Controller, J5 and attach

it to the Front Y Servo Controller Connector, J5 (see Figure 9-42).
3 Follow the procedure "W riting Param eters to the X Servo Controller
(Carriage)." In step 11, replace "carriage.par" with "tension.par".
When done, return all Servo Controller Cable connections to their
original positions.

X Servo Cable → X Servo Connector, J5

Front Y Servo Cable → Front Y Servo Connector, J5

Troubleshooting 9-55
9-56 C hapter 9
 Chapter 10
Specifications
••••••

UltraVu 3360
Printing Technology
Piezo drop-on-demand inkjet technology
360 dots per inch (dpi) addressible resolution
Eight color capability providing enhanced image quality

Media Handling
Roller Width: 128" (325 cm)
Media Width: 126" (320 cm) max
RoImage Width:120" (305 cm)
Print width: 120" (305 cm) print width
Media type: Pressure-sensitive, paper, vinyl, and mesh
Loading: Rolls up to 18" diameter (core size 3" to 6")
Output: Roll, optional re-wind with air core optional

Speed
Three operational modes with multiple speed settings

Productivity (ft 2 per hr / m 2 per hr)

Mode/Speed1 8-Color 4-Color
High/Max: 1070/100 1330/124
Enhanced/Max: 630/59 1070/100
Ultra/Max: 320/30 615/57
Note: 1. Print output based on 120" (305 cm) width

UltraVu 3360 RIP

Multi-language graphical user interface
Supportable PostScript 3
Gamma control over global brightness
Excellent color reproduction to match original art work

S pecifications 10-1
 ICC color management
Light Cyan and Light Magenta, support for smooth highlights to
mid-tone transitions, improved color quality, and higher apparent
resolution
Tiling feature to simplify complex printing jobs

Formats
All popular desktop file formats, including PostScript 3, EPS,TIFF

Control Station
Windows NT On-Line 3360 Control Station:
UltraVu 3360 Operating Software
256 MB of memory

18 GB hard disk
2 GB Jaz Drive
CD ROM
100 BASE-TX Ethernet Adapter

Environmental Specifications
Compressed Air: 80 psi (min), 150 psi (max), 4cfm dry air only
Temperature: 68° F to 85° F (20° to 29° C)
Humidity: 20% to 80% (non-condensing)
Weight: 5600 lbs. ( 2540 kg)
Height: 62" (155 cm)
Width: 192" (487 cm); 230" (584 cm) with workstation
Depth: 50"(127cm); 95" (240 cm) with I/O options
Electrical: 208 or 400 VAC, 3 phase, 40 amps (4 or 5 wire)

Inks
3.75 liter bottles in Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, Light Magenta,
Light Cyan, Light Yellow and Light Black (Inks are Solvent-based)

10-2 C hapter 10
 Appendix A
Upgrading Software
••••••

Introduction
T his sectio n describ es how to u pg rad e the firm w are and so ftw are fo r the
U ltraVu 33 60 P rinter.
D etailed below a re in struction s for up grading the V x W orks firm w are
and U ltraVu so ftw are on the U ltraVu 33 60 p rinte rs. T h ese in stru ction s
w ill also g u ide y o u thro u g h th e p ro cess o f crea tin g th e d isk s for the
V x W orks firm w are o r U ltraVu softw are from a CD, a set of floppy
diskettes or by using files downloaded from the V U T E K S u pp ort w e b
site (w w w.vu tek supo ort.co m ). T h e late st firm w a re an d softw a re
versio ns are av ailble at the Vu tek su pp ort.com w e bsite
(w w w.v u teksu p o o rt.co m ) o r b y c alling C usto m er S up po rt.

Recovering from Flash Drive Failure

If th e U ltraVu 3 36 0 P rin ter F lash D riv e beco m es inacce ssible for any
re ason, th e p rinter can still be re stored to w o rk ing order b y using the
33 60 P rinter R e cov ery P rog ram - 3 360 .E X E .
T his p ro gram w ill crea te th ree d isks to reform at and reload the 33 60
o p era tin g syste m . You ca n o b tain the latest v ersion o f 3 3 6 0 .E X E fro m
th e V U T E k S u pp ort W eb P age:
h ttp://w w w.v ute ksup po rt.co m
S im ply do w nload the p ro gram , run, and fo llo w th e instru ctions on the
scre en.

U pgrading S oftw are A-1

Creating UltraVu Firm w are and Softw are Disks

Using the CD Option

Required Disks

C D Version :
33 60 U pg rad e D isk fo r th e V x W orksfirm w are ,
C o lorB u rst R IP and U ltraVu softw are

D iskette Versio n:
A A 90 14 8 V x W orks F o rm at (D O S fo rm atter d isk) Versio n 100
A A 90 14 7 V xW o rk s L o ader Version 1 00
A A 90 25 6 V xW o rk s 3 36 0 Im ag e Version R 1 .001
A A 90 25 5 U ltraVu 3 360 C o ntrol R ev 1.2 (D isk # 1 an d D isk # 2)

Making UltraVu Firmware Disks - CD Option

To create the F irm w are U p grad e F lop p y D isk s, d o th e follow in g:

1 Load the CD and open the VxWorks folder.
2 From the VxWorks folder, select and run the file labeled makevx.bat.
T his file w ill prom pt y ou to lab el and insert disks into th e flopp y driv e.
F ollow the in struction s c ontain ed in the b atch file a s as it is p re se nte d.
3 Once all three (3) disks are complete, terminate the batch program.
T he disks are read y to u se. R efer to th e follo w in g section s o n
in stallation instructio ns fo r th e firm w a re.

Making UltraVu Software Disks - CD Option

To create the S oftw are U p grad e F lop p y D isks, do th e follow in g:

1 Load the CD and open the UltraVu 3360 folder.
2 Open the folder labeled UltraVu_3360_Disk1.
3 Label and insert a disk into the floppy drive.

A-2 A ppendix A
4 Copy all files in this folder to the floppy.
5 Remove disk when copying is complete
6 Open the folder labeled UltraVu_3360_Disk2.
7 Label and insert a disk into the floppy drive.
8 Copy all files in this folder to the floppy.
9 Remove disk when copying is complete.
T he disk s are n ow read y for u se w ith the abo ve proced ure for reb uilding
or upd ating the firm w are .

Making UltraVu Firmware Disks - Vuteksupport.com Option

O n ce yo u hav e log ged o n to the Vutek S up po rt w ebsite
(w w w.v u teksu p p o rt.co m ), g o to th e U ltra Vu 3 3 6 0 p a g e and d ow nload
th e V xW o rk s firm w are bu ild file. Yo u m ust place it in a tem po ra ry
d irecto ry b y itself. Yo u w ill also n ee d th ree (3) b lan k fo rm atted
diskettes (1 .4 4 M B ).

To create the d isk s, p erform the follow in g step s:

1 Download the file: 3360vx.exe
2 Place the 3360vx.exe file in a temporary directory.
3 This function will require three (3) formatted blank diskettes.
4 Enter the temporary directory and select the file 3360vx.exe. Double
click or right click and select run to execute the file.
T his file w ill self e xtract sev en (7) files into the tem porary direc tory.
5 Select the file makevx.bat. Double click and select run to execute the
batch file.
T his p ro gram w ill p ro m p t y ou to in sert d isk s as n ee d ed to b u ild the d isk
im ag es.
6 Label the first disk VxWorks Format Revision 1.00 and place in the
floppy drive. Press any key to continue.
7 When prompted, label the second disk VxWorks 3360 Loader
Revision 1.00 and place in the floppy drive. Press any key to
continue.
8 When prompted, label the third disk VxWorks 3360 Image Revision
1.01 and place in the floppy drive. Press any key to continue.
9 When finished, close the window.
T he disk s are n ow read y for u se w ith the abo ve proced ure for reb uilding
or upd ating the firm w are .

U pgrading S oftw are A-3

Making UltraVu Software Disks - Vuteksupport.com Option
O n ce yo u hav e log ged o n to the Vutek S up po rt w ebsite
(w w w.v u teksu p p o rt.co m ), g o to th e U ltra Vu 3 3 6 0 p a g e and d ow nload
th e U ltraVu so ftw are bu ild file. You m u st place it in a tem po rary
d irecto ry b y itself. Yo u w ill n e ed tw o (2 ) b lan k fo rm atted d iske ttes
(1 .44 M B ) for this p ro cedu re.

To create the softw are d isk s, d o th e follow in g:

1 Download the file: uv3360.exe
2 Place the uv3360.exe file in a temporary directory.
T his fun ctio n w ill req uire tw o (2 ) form atte d b la n k d iskettes.
3 Enter the temporary directory and select the file uv3360.exe. Double
click or right click and select run to execute the file.
T his file w ill self ex tract tw o (2) files into th e tem po rary d irecto ry,
uv 33 60-1.ex e and u v3 360 -2 .exe.
4 Insure that a non-write protected formatted disk is in Drive A. From
the DOS prompt, access the temporary directory where the uv3360-
1.exe file is located. Type the DOS command line uv3360-1.exe A:\.
T his p ro gram w ill cop y th e n ecessary files to the flop py d isk .
5 When completed, label the disk UltraVu Software Revision 3360 Disk
#1.
6 Place a second non-write protected formatted disk in Drive A. From
the DOS prompt, access the temporary directory where the uv3360-
2.exe file is located. Next, type the DOS command line uv3360-2.exe
A:\.
T his p ro gram w ill cop y th e n ecessary files to the flop py d isk .
7 When completed, label the disk UltraVu Software Revision 3360 Disk
#2.
T he disk s are n ow read y for u se w ith the abo ve proced ure for reb uilding
or upd ating the U ltraVu softw are.

A-4 A ppendix A
Installing UltraVu Software and Firm ware

Installing UltraVu Firm ware

Verifying BIOS Settings for Flash Drive

T he B IO S setu p fo r the F lash D rive (R O M d isk) dev ice th at is utilized
as a h ard drive in th is con figuration m u st hav e L B A M o de set to
D isabled. T h e follo w in g pro cedu re w ill d irect y ou th ro ug h th e B IO S
setting s to prop erly co nfigu re the prin ter con tro ller B IO S values for
prop er o peration w ith the V xW orks b ased firm w are.

To verify settin g, d o th e follow ing:

1 Power on the printer with the Printer-Workstation Switch in the
Printer position.
T he m otherbo ard iden tification lo go appe ars on the screen.
2 Press F2 repeatedly to enter the BIOS.
T he B IO S U tility S creen ap pears,
3 Scroll right on the menu bar and highlight the Advanced menu.
Scroll down to the IDE Configuration heading and press the enter
key.
4 Select Primary IDE Master and press the enter key.
T he P rim ary ID E M a ster settin gs are a s follow s:
Ty p e U ser
M ax im u m C ap acity 20 M eg
M u lti S ecto r Tran sfers D isabled
L B A M o d e C o n tro l D isabled
Tran sfer M o de F ast P IO 1
U ltra D M A D isabled
5 Once configured, press the F10 key to save and exit.
T he prin ter w ill shu td ow n and restart.
6 Proceed to the "Installing UltraVu Firmware to Flash Drive"
procedure outlined.

U pgrading S oftw are A-5

 Installing UltraVu Firmware to Flash Drive

To in stall the firm w are, d o the follow in g:

1 Insert the disk labeled VxWorks Format into the printer controller
floppy drive. Press the reset button or power on the printer.
2 At the A: prompt, type the command Fdisk and press enter.
3 From the menu select Delete Partition or Logical Dos Drive and follow
instructions.
4 Once the partition is deleted, a new Dos partition must be created.
Select Create Partition or Logical Dos Drive and press enter.
5 Once the function is complete, select Set Active Partition.
T his w ill se t the P rim ary D o s P artitio n active.
Exit the Fdisk routine.
6 At the A: prompt, type the command Format C:, press enter and
follow the instructions.
T his w ill fo rm at D rive C (F lash R O M D isk ).
C a u tion : D o n ot a dd D os system files o r m ake th e disk b ootab le.
7 Insert the disk labeled VxWorks 3360 Image into the printer controller
floppy disk drive.
T he A : p ro m p t a p p ea rs.
8 Type Copy *.* C: and press enter.
You sh ou ld v erify that the file V xW ork s h as b een co pie d.
9 Insert the disk labeled VxW orks Loader into the floppy drive. Press
the Reset button to reboot the printer.
T he Im a ge L oad er d isk routin e w ill lo ad th e boo t im ag e o n to the d isk
and ren der it bo otable.
10 Remove the floppy disk from the drive and press Reset to reboot the
system.
T he p rin ter sho uld n o w b oo t a n d b e o p era tio n al u n d e r the con trol o f the
U ltrraVu 3 36 0 F irm w are .
11 Press Scroll Lock ⇒ Scroll Lock ⇒ ↑.
T he P rinter S tatus W ind ow w ill app ear.
12 Select the Printer Setup Tab.
T he P rinter S etu p W in d o w a p p e ars.
13 Verify the Vacuum Reading value (see Figure A-1) on the screen is
approximately the vacuum measured with the Manometer that was
shipped with your printer.

A-6 A ppendix A
 Figure A-1 Printer Firmware - Printer Setup Window

14 Select the proper Channel Enable Bits (see Figure A-1) so the
settings correspond with the desired setup, i.e. 4-, 6-, or 8-channel
printing.
15 Click Apply.
T his w ill sa ve th e settings an d exit th e p ro gram .
16 Proceed to "Installing UltraVu Software" outlined in the next section.
N o te: T he V xWorks op erating system ha s no u seable com m a nd line
fu nction s. C tl-A lt-D el is an un reco gnized com m a nd an d yo u m ust press
reset to reb oo t the p rinter. A n y disk fo rm a tting or p artitioning m u st b e
ha nd led u sing the V xWo rks F orm a t disk.

Installing UltraVu Software

T he U ltraVu S oftw are D isk S et uses a setu p prog ram to install th e
softw are o nto the W o rk station h ard drive . You m u st be lo gg ed on to the
N T W orkstatio n as A d m in istrato r to p erfo rm the follo w in g fu n ctio ns.

To in stall the U ltraVu S oftw are, perform th e follow ing step s:

1 Insert the disk labeled UltraVu Disk #1 of 2 into the workstation floppy
disk drive.

U pgrading S oftw are A-7

 2 From Desktop screen, select Start then Run. Type A:\Setup and click
OK.
F ollow the setu p prog ra m s in struction s.
3 From the selection options select Next, Yes, and Next for the
remaining options. When instructed, remove Disk #1, insert Disk #2,
and select OK.
T he in stall w ill proceed au to m atic ally. If this in stallation is an u pgrad e,
D isk #2 m ay n ot b e req uired .
4 When the Setup is complete, remove Disk #2 and then select Finish.
T he W orkstation w ill p erfo rm an au tom atic re boo t. T his sho uld
com p lete the installa tio n o f the U ltraVu 3 36 0 S oftw are a nd F irm w a re.

A-8 A ppendix A
 Appendix B
Ventilation Hood Design
••••••

V U T E k d o es n ot su p p ly a v e n tilation sy stem fo r th e U ltraVu 3 3 6 0

D ig ital P rintin g S y stem s, b ut d oes rec o m m en d a v en tilatio n h o o d
d esig n . T he follo w in g p ag es d eta il th at d e sig n .

Suggested Blower Specifications

40 0-50 0 cfm (17-20 m 3 /m in) at in let
T E F C , A lum . Vane @ 1 .5 -2 .0 (3 8-55 m m ) H 2 0
6"-8" (15 -2 00 m m ) inlet diam e ter

Ventilation H ood D esign B-1

 F igu re B -1 Ventilation H ood D esign

B-2 A ppendix B
F ig ure B -1 Ven tila tio n H oo d D esig n (co nt’d)

Ventilation H ood D esign B-3

 F igu re B -1 Ventilation H o od D esign (cont’d )

B-4 A ppendix B
F ig ure B -1 Ventilation H oo d D esign (con t’d )

Ventilation H ood D esign B-5

 F ig ure B -2 C u rtain S et

B-6 A ppendix B
F ig ure B -2 C u rtain S et (con t’d )

Ventilation H ood D esign B-7

B-8 A ppendix B
 Appendix C
Rem ovable Disks
••••••

Form atting Rem ovable JAZ Cartridges

T he follow in g proced ure describ es h ow to form at a rem ov able JA Z
cartridg e.
N o te: If a C a rtrid ge w a s p reviou sly fo rm atted , it w ill no t be necessary
to create a new p artition in the follow ing p ro cedu re.

To form at a JA Z C artridge you w ill n eed to p erform th ese step s:

1 Select My Computer under Windows and note the removable disk(s)
letter(s). Record the letter(s) here for future reference: ____________
(For example- F:\)
2 Insert the cartridge into the drive.
3 From the desktop menu select Start in the lower left corner. Select
Programs, then Administrative Tools (Common) and then Disk
Administrator.
4 Click OK to the warnings and Yes to confirm.
5 Right click on the removable disk letter inside the diagonal lined box.
This selects the disk to be formatted.
6 Select Create. This creates the necessary partition information on the
selected removable cartridge. Click OK.
7 Right click on the removable disk letter inside the diagonal lined box.
This is the letter that was assigned in the first step above.
8 Select Commit changes now, click Yes to confirm, and then click OK.
9 Right click on the removable disk letter located inside the diagonal
lined box.
10 Select the Format option.
In the form at m enu b ox , go to F ile S y stem and select either FAT (F ile
A lloc atio n Tab le) or N T F S (N T F ile S ystem ) disk fo rm ats.
N o te: If this ca rtrid ge w ill be used w ith a p rep ress system , th e o pera tor
m u st use th e FAT (F ile A llocation Ta ble) fo rm a t.
11 Under the Format Options, select Start and click OK when the
warning box appears. The format process will begin.
12 When the process stops close all currently opened windows.

R em ovable D isks C-1

C-2 A ppendix C
 Appendix D
M aterial Safety Data Sheets
••••••

M aterial S afety D ata S heets acc om pan y all chem ica l com po un ds
shipped w ith U ltraVu prin ers. F or y ou r con ven ien ce th e follo w in g
p ag es p ro v id e d a ta sheet su m m a rie s for the in k s an d clean in g solven ts
used w ith th e p rinters.

M aterial S afety D ata S heets D-1

D-2 A ppendix D
M aterial S afety D ata S heets D-3
D-4 A ppendix D
M aterial S afety D ata S heets D-5
D-6 A ppendix D
M aterial S afety D ata S heets D-7
D-8 A ppendix D
 Appendix E
UltraVu 3360 Accessories
••••••

Introduction
T he U ltraVu 33 60 p rinter can b e equ ipp ed w ith se veral op tio ns,
in clu din g a W ind er an d an U nw ind er. T his section discu sses the
op era tio n of each o f th ese a ccessories,

Unwinder Accessory
T he U nw in der A cce sso ry (se e F igu re E -1) prov id es an effective m ea ns
fo r un ro lling sub strate m aterial fro m a roll a nd fe edin g it in to a m ach in e.

U nw inder
Accessory

Figure E-1 Unwinder Accessory Attached to Rear of Printer.

UltraVu 3360 Accessories E-1

 C o n tinu o u s sub strates are fed into the U ltraVu 3 3 6 0 b y the U n w in d e r
A cc esso ry, w hic h is attached to th e U ltraVu 336 0 du ring insta llatio n.
T he roll of su bstrate is load ed on the U nw ind er ’s A ir C o re S h aft an d fed
u n d er the Inco m in g N IP R o lle r as sh o w n in F ig u re E -2 .

Air C ore
Shaft

U nw inder

Figure E-2 Feeding Media from the Unwinder Accessory.

To load contin u ou s m ed ia u sin g the U nw in d er A ccessory:

1 Remove the Air Core Shaft from the Unwinder.
2 Slide the Air Core Shaft into a new roll of substrate.
3 Re-install the Air Core Shaft into the Unwinder.
4 Feed substrate from source roll to the Incoming NIP Rollers.
5 Adjust the Pinch Roller height.

Unwinder Control Panel

T he U nw in d er A ccessory h as its o w n c o n tro l p a n el, w hich can b e fo u n d
on the le ft en d of the U nw ind er. T hese co ntrols su pp ly p ow er, ten sion ,
fe ed d irectio n , a n d air p ressure in d ep en d ent o f th e p rinter ’s con trols.
T he U n w in d e r C o n trol P an el is sho w n in F ig u re E -3 .

E-2 Appendix E
 ..

Air Line & N ozzle

Forw ard/R everse

Sw itch

Tension C ontrol

O N /O FF Sw itch

Figure E-3 Unwinder Control Panel

You w ill need to use these con trols to ro tate the A ir C ore S h aft a nd
un w ind m ate ria l w h ile load ing m ed ia.
Forward/Reverse Switch cau ses the A ir C o re S ha ft to ro tate a s
in dic ated b y th e sw itch po sition . F O RWA R D feed s o ut n ew
m aterial, w hile R E V E R S E rolls m aterial ba ck on to the core. .
Tension Control is used to app ly v ary in g am ou nts of back ten sion to
sub stra te as it un ro lls fro m the S ou rce R o ll.
ON/OFF switch sup plies o r rem ov es p ow er to the U nw ind er
A cc esso ry.
Air Line & Nozzle supp lies the nec essary air p ressu re to the A ir S ha ft.
A s com p ressed a ir fills the co re , th e A ir S h aft beco m es secu red to the
S ubstrate R oll.

UltraVu 3360 Accessories E-3

 Working with the Air Core Shaft on the Unwinder
T he A ir C o re S h aft m u st be re m o ved from the U nw ind er in order to
in stall a n ew roll of su bstrate . T he h ard w are at each e nd o f th e sh aft is
sho w n in F igu re E -4.

U nlock Lock

Shaft C huck

Shaft C radle

Shaft End
Air C ore Inlet

Figure E-4 Air Core Shaft Hardware

To rem ove th e air core sh aft from th e un w in der:

Using the Unwinder Control Panel, rotate the shaft until the shaft end
is on top of the shaft cradle, as shown in Figure E-4.
1 At each end of the shaft, unlock the safety chuck by pulling the top
of the flange away from the shaft.
2 Lift the shaft out of its fittings and place it on the floor.
N o te: If th e safety chu ck w ill no t un lock, th e shaft is no t in the correct
po sition .
You can n ow rem ov e th e shaft fro m the ca rd boa rd c ore and slid e it into
a new roll. O n ce a n ew roll is load ed o nto the A ir C ore S h aft, y ou can
re -in stall th e sh aft into th e U nw in der.
N o te: F in d som eo ne to a ssist w hile lifting th e A ir C ore Sh aft in to place.

E-4 Appendix E
 To re-in stall the A ir C ore S h aft in to th e U n w in d er:
1 Lift the shaft and insert its ends in the rectangular shaft cradles.
2 Lock the shaft in place by pushing the top of each safety chuck
toward the shaft.
3 Inflate the air core by inserting the air nozzle into the air core inlet and
pressing the trigger for 1-2 seconds (see Figure E-5).

Air
Core
Inlet

Nozzle

Figure E-5 Unwinder Accessory Showing Nozzle and Air Core Inlet

UltraVu 3360 Accessories E-5

W inder Accessory
T he W in der A ccesso ry p ro vides an effective m eans for rollin g sub strate
m aterial e xiting the m ach in e a nd o nto a roll. O utpu t on co ntinu ou s
sub stra tes is fed into th e U ltraVu 3 36 0 W ind er A ccessory, as sh ow n in
F igu re E -6.

Take-up
R oller

W inder

Figure E-6 Feeding Media onto the Winder Accessory.

To ou tp u t contin u ou s m edia on to th e W ind er A ccessory:

1 Remove the Air Core Shaft from the Winder.
2 Slide the Air Core Shaft into an empty cardboard roll.
3 Re-install the Air Core Shaft into the Winder.
4 Move the leading edge of the substrate through the printer.
5 Fix the substrate to the cardboard roll.
6 Wind substrate onto the Take-up Roll.

Winder Control Panel

T heW in d er A ccessory h as its o w n c o n tro l p an e l, w h ich can b e fou nd o n
th e rig ht en d of the W ind er. T h ese c ontro ls supp ly p ow er, ten sion , feed
d irectio n , a n d air p ressure in d ep en d ent o f th e p rinter ’s co ntrols. T he
U n w in d e r C o n trol P an el is sho w n in F ig u re E -7 .

E-6 Appendix E
 .

Air Line & N ozzle

Forward/R everse
Sw itch

Tension C ontrol

O N /O FF Sw itch

Figure E-7 Winder Control Panel

You w ill ne ed to use these con trols to ro tate th e A ir C o re S haft and w ind
and unw in d w h en un lo ading m ed ia.
Forward/Reverse Switch cau ses the A ir C o re S ha ft to ro tate a s
in dic ated b y th e sw itch po sition . F O RWA R D feed s o ut n ew
m aterial, w hile R E V E R S E rolls m aterial ba ck on to the core. .
Tension Control is used to app ly v ary in g am ou nts of back ten sion to
sub stra te as it rolls o nto th e Takeu p R o ll.
ON/OFF switch sup plies o r rem ov es p ow er to the W in der A cce sso ry.
Air Line & Nozzle supp lies the nec essary air p ressu re to the A ir S ha ft.
A s com p ressed a ir fills the co re , th e A ir S h aft beco m es secu red to the
Tak eup R oll.

UltraVu 3360 Accessories E-7

 Working with the Air Core Shaft on the Winder
T he A ir C o re S h aft m u st be re m o ved from the W in der in o rd er to
re m o ve prin ted ro ll of substrate. T h e hardw are at e ach end of the shaft
is sho w n in F igu re E -8.

U nlock Lock

Shaft C huck

Shaft C radle

Shaft End
Air C ore Inlet

Figure E-8 Air Core Shaft Hardware

To rem ove th e air core sh aft from th e W in d er:

Using the Unwinder Control Panel, rotate the shaft until the shaft end
is on top of the shaft cradle, as shown in Figure E-8.
1 At each end of the shaft, unlock the safety chuck by pulling the top
of the flange away from the shaft.
2 Lift the shaft out of its fittings and place it on the floor.
N o te: If th e safety chu ck w ill no t un lock, th e shaft is no t in the correct
po sition .
You can n ow rem ov e th e shaft fro m the ca rd boa rd c ore and slid e it into
a new roll. O n ce a n ew roll is load ed o nto the A ir C ore S h aft, y ou can
re -in stall th e sh aft into th e U nw in der.
N o te: F in d som eo ne to a ssist w hile lifting th e A ir C ore Sh aft in to place.

E-8 Appendix E
 To re-in stall the A ir C ore S h aft in to th e W ind er:
1 Lift the shaft and insert its ends in the rectangular shaft cradles.
2 Lock the shaft in place by pushing the top of each safety chuck
toward the shaft.
3 Inflate the air core by inserting the air nozzle into the air core inlet and
pressing the trigger for 1-2 seconds (see Figure E-9).

Air
Core
Inlet

Nozzle

Figure E-9 Winder Accessory Showing Nozzle and Air Core Inlet

UltraVu 3360 Accessories E-9

E-10 Appendix E
 Glossary
••••••

Air cylinders - P neu m atic d evic es, w h ich raise an d lo w er th e rolls.

Am bient - Te m p era ture of air in th e ro om w here equ ip m ent is located.
Application - A ny co m pu ter so ftw are o r firm w are that can be con trolled
by a dy nam ic u ser interface u tilizing the m o nitor, key bo ard , and m o use.
Banding Vertical strip e, o f a n y w id th , in the p rin ted im a g e.
BIOS - A n acrony m for b a sic inp ut/ou tp ut sy stem . O n P C -c om patib le
com p ute rs, the set o f essential so ftw are ro utines th at te st hardw are at
startu p, start the o perating sy stem , an d sup port the transfer o f data
am on g hardw are d evices. T h e B IO S is stored in read -o nly m e m o ry
(R O M ) so th at it ca n be ex ecuted w h en th e com pu ter is turne d on .
A ltho ug h critical to perfo rm an ce, the B IO S is usu ally inv isib le to
com p u te r u sers.
Blotching - M ottled app earan ce in p rinted im ag e.
BM P - A ncron ym fo r M icrosoft’s v ersion o f a bitm ap file .
Bit m ap - A data structu re in m em ory th at re presents in fo rm atio n in the
fo rm of a collection o f in dividual bits. A b it m ap is u sed to rep resen t a
b it im age. A n o th er u se o f a b it m ap in som e syste m s is the rep resentatio n
o f the b lo ck s o f sto rag e o n a d isk, in d ic atin g w heth er e ach b lo ck is free
(0 ) o r in u se (1 ).
Carriage - A n en clo sure h oldin g th e Jet P acks, S ec ond ary In k S ystem ,
and contro l ha rd w are fo r U ltraVu ’s p rin t he ads. T h is enclosu re m ov es
across the p rinte r ho rizon tally on the T h om son rails.
Carriage bearings - B all b earin g assem blies w h ich su p p o rt the p rint
head carria ge on the T ho m son rails.
Carriage drive assem bly - C arriag e m o tor. cap stan , an d enc ode r, th eir
b earin g s, p u lley s a n d m ou ntin g p lates, an d th e d rive b elt an d en cod er
cou pler.
Carriage m otor - D C m otor u sed to m o ve th e carriage.
Carriage ribbon cables - M u lti-co lo r fla t cab les w hich interc onn ect th e
circuit bo ard s on th e carriage.

G lossary G-1
 Closed loop - A con tro l strateg y in w h ich actio ns are d eterm ine d by
fe edb ack from th e ph ysical env iro nm en t. F o r ex am p le, th e c arriag e
driv e o perates in a clo se d lo op b ecause it receives feedb ack fro m the
linear enco der. S ee O p en lo op .
CM YK - A cron ym fo r cy an-m agen ta-yello w -bla ck . A co lo r m od el th at
is sim ilar to the C M Y co lor m o d el b u t p ro d u ces b la ck w ith a sep arate
black co m p on ent rath er than b y add in g 10 0 percen t of c yan , m agen ta,
and yellow.
Color pressure gauges - G aug es w hich sho w th e am o un t of reg ulated
air pressure su pp lied to the color jets.
Console covers - sheet-m etal bo xes on the to p of each en d of the
prin ter, w here th e p rinter co ntrols a re lo cate d.
Contouring - S tep s in w h at sho uld b e even colo r g rad ation s in the
prin ted im a ge.
Control m onitor - C RT m onito r w h ich d isp lay s the U ltraVu con trol
softw are.
CPU - T he com p uta tio nal a nd co ntrol unit of a c om pu ter. T he cen tral
proce ssing u nit is the d evice that interp re ts and ex ecutes instru ctions.
S ing le-chip cen tral processing u nits, called m icrop rocessors, m ad e
p o ssible p erso n al co m p u ters a n d w orkstatio n s. E xa m p les o f sin g le-chip
centra l processing u nits are th e In tel P entiu m II an d P e ntium III ch ips.
T he cen tral proce ssing u nit--o r m icrop ro cessor, in th e c ase o f a
m icroco m p uter--has th e a bility to fetch , d ecod e, an d ex ecute
in stru ction s an d to transfer in fo rm ation to and fro m other resou rce s ov er
th e c o m pu ter's m ain d ata-tra n sfer p ath, th e b us.
Dongle - A secu rity d evice co nne cted to an in pu t/o utput po rt to p erm it
th e use o f a partic ular softw are pack age on that com p uter. T he u se of th e
h ardw are k ey p erm its b ack u p co p y ing o f so ftw are b u t p re v en ts its
un lic ensed u se o n ad ditio nal co m puters.
DPI - A cron ym fo r d o ts p er inch . A m ea su re o f screen an d p rin ter
re so lu tio n th at is ex pressed as the n um ber of dots that a d evice can prin t
o r d isp lay p er lin ea r in ch.
Edge detector - E le ctronic m o du le on the carriag e w hich senses th e
edg e of the sub strate on the p late n.
Encoder - A n electrical d evice w hich prov id es the co m p uter w ith
in fo rm ation o n carriage o r sub strate po sition .

G-2 G lossary
EPS - A c ro nym for E ncap sulated P o stS cript. A P ostS crip t file form a t
th at can b e u sed as an in dep end ent e ntity. T he E P S im a ge m ust be
in corpo rated in to the P ostS crip t ou tpu t of an app lication su ch as a
d esk to p p ub lish er. M an y h ig h -q u ality clip-art p acka g es c o n sist o f such
im ag es.
ESC - A k ey o n a com pu ter k ey b o a rd that sen ds th e e sc ap e (E S C )
character to th e com p ute r. In m an y ap plication s, the E scape key m ov es
th e u ser b ack on e lev el in the m enu stru ctu re o r exits th e p ro gram .
ESC character - O ne o f th e 3 2 co ntrol cod es d efined in th e A S C II
character set. It u sually ind icates th e beg inn in g o f an escape se que nce (a
string o f cha racters th at giv e instru ctio ns to a dev ice such as a p rinte r).
It is rep resen ted intern ally as c haracter cod e 27 (hex adec im al 1B ).
FAT - A cro ny m fo r F ile A llo cation Tab le. A table or list m aintained by
som e ope rating sy stem s to m anag e d isk spac e u se d fo r file storag e. F iles
on a d isk are stored, as space allow s, in fixed -siz e g ro up s o f b ytes
(c h aracters) rath er th an fro m b eg in n ing to en d as c o n tig u o u s strin g s o f
tex t or nu m bers. A sing le file can th us b e sca ttered in p ieces ov er m any
separate storage areas. A file allo cation table m a ps availab le disk
sto rag e sp ace so th at it c an m ark fla w ed seg m ents th at sho uld no t be
used a nd can fin d an d lin k th e pie ces o f a file. In M S -D O S , the file
allocatio n tab le is com m on ly k no w n as th e FAT.
Firm w are - S o ftw are ro utines sto red in read-on ly m em ory (R O M ).
U n lik e ran dom access m em ory (R A M ), read-on ly m em ory stays in tact
even in the absen ce of e lectrical po w er. S tartu p routin es an d lo w -lev el
in put/o utp ut instru ctio ns are stored in firm w are. It falls b etw een
softw are an d hardw are in term s o f ease o f m od ification .
Hardw are - T h e p hy sical c om po nen ts of a com pu ter system , in clud in g
any p eriph eral eq uip m ent such as printers, m o dem s, an d m o use d evices.
GIF - A cron ym for G rap hic In terchan ge F o rm at. A stand ard file fo rm at
com m on ly u sed for scan ning , sto rag e, an d in tercha nge o f grap hic
im ag es. G IF is one o f th e stand ard im age form ats rec ogn ize d by w eb
brow sers.
Ink level sensor - F lo at sw itch in secon dary ink tank w hic h senses in k
lev el in tank .
Ink pum p - T h e p um p that m o ves in k from prim ary in k tan k to
secon dary in k ta nk.
Ink supply tubes - L on g p olyethylene tu bes b etw een ink p um ps a nd th e
prin t head carriag e.

G lossary G-3
 Interface cable - C able w h ich interco nne cts the im a ge com p ute r and
th e V U T E k p rinter.
I/O - A cro n y m for in p u t/o utp u t. T he co m p lem en tary tasks o f g ath erin g
data for a co m puter or a p ro gram to w ork w ith , an d of m aking the resu lts
of the co m puter's activ ities a vailable to th e user or to other c om pu ter
p ro ce sses. G atherin g d ata is u su ally d on e w ith in p u t d ev ices such as the
k ey bo ard and the m ou se, a s w ell a s d isk files, w hile th e o u tp u t is u su ally
m ade av aila ble to the u ser v ia th e d isplay an d th e p rinter an d via d isk
files or com m un ication s p orts fo r the com p ute r.
LCD - A cro ny m for L iqu id C ry stal D isplay. A ty pe o f displa y th at uses
a liq uid com p oun d havin g a po lar m o lecu lar stru ctu re, sand w iched
betw een tw o transpa ren t elec tro des. W h en an electric field is app lied,
th e m o lecu les align w ith the field, fo rm in g a crystallin e arran gem ent
th at po larizes th e lig ht p assing throu gh it. A po larized filter lam in ated
ov er th e electro des block s p olarized ligh t. In this w ay, a g rid of
elec trodes can se lectively "turn o n" a ce ll, or a p ix el, c ontain in g the
liquid crystal m aterial, tu rn ing it d ark . In som e ty pes of liq uid cry stal
display s, an e lectro lum inescen t pan el is placed b ehind the scre en to
illum in ate it. O th er ty p e s o f liq u id cry sta l d isp lay s are cap able o f
re p ro d u cin g co lo r.
Jet tube - P oly eth ylene tu be b etw een secon dary ink tank an d jet.
LED - A sem icon duc tor de vice tha t con verts electric al en ergy into ligh t,
used , fo r ex am ple , for th e activity lig hts on com pu ter disk d rives. L ig ht-
em ittin g diode s w ork on the p rin cip le of electro lu m inesce nce and are
h ig h ly efficie n t, p ro d u cin g little h ea t fo r th e am o u n t o f lig ht o utp u t.
Lines - H orizo ntal stripe s, of any w id th, in the prin ted im age.
M otor pulley - To othed m etal gear b y w hich the c arriag e m otor tu rn s th e
driv e b elt.
M S-DOS - A cro ny m for M icro so ft D isk O p eratin g S y stem . A sing le-
task ing , single-user o perating sy stem w ith a com m and -lin e interface,
re leased in 19 81 , for IB M P C s and com patib les. M S -D O S , like o th er
o p era tin g syste m s, o v ersees o p eratio n s such as d isk in p u t and o u tp u t,
video sup po rt, k eyb oard con trol, and m any in ternal func tio ns rela ted to
p ro g ram exe cu tion a n d file m ainte n an ce.
Nozzle - O rifice in jet assem bly w hic h discharg es a stre am o f atom ize d
in k drop s.
Nylatrac - N y lo n skele to n w hich sup po rts an d p ro tects th e tu b es and
cables in th e um bilical assem bly.
Panels - F lat shee t-m etal pieces w h ich co ver th e p rinter's fram ew ork.

G-4 G lossary
PDF - T he A dob e specification for electro nic d ocu m e nts th at use the
A d ob e A cro bat fam ily o f serv ers a nd read ers. T h e acron ym for po rtable
do cum en t fo rm at.
Pinholes - S m all w hite spo ts in the im ag e, 1 m m or less in diam eter,
app earing in g ro ups or ran do m ly.
Posterization - S ee C o ntourin g.
Prim ary ink tank - 5 -liter p la stic ta n k s lo cate d in the in k d raw e r
assem bly.
Printer controller - Intern al co m p uter w hic h con trols all printer
o p era tio n s.
Printer pow er supply - L a rg e bo x in rear o f co ntroller com pa rtm en t;
prov id es sp ecial v oltag e u sed by printer.
PPI - T h e n um b er of pix els displayed p er u nit of leng th in an im ag e is
called th e im age resolutio n , u su ally m easu red in p ix els p e r in ch (p p i). .
PS - A cro n y m for P o stS crip t. A p ag e-desc rip tio n lan g u ag e from
A d ob e S y stem s that o ffers flexible fon t capa bility and h ig h-qua lity
graph ics. T he m ost w ell-kn ow n pa ge-descrip tio n lan gu age, P ostS crip t
uses E ng lish-lik e com m and s to co ntro l pag e lay ou t and to load and sca le
ou tline fon ts.
RFI - A cro ny m for radio frequ enc y interferenc e. N oise introd uced into
an electron ic circuit, such as a ra dio o r telev isio n, by electrom ag netic
ra diatio n prod uced b y an oth er circu it, suc h as a co m puter.
RIP - A cron ym fo r ra ster im a ge proce sso r. A dev ice, con sisting o f
hardw are and softw a re, th at co nv erts vector graph ics o r text into a raster
(b itm a pped ) im a ge. R aster im age p ro cessors are used in pag e prin ters,
ph oto ty pesetters, electrosta tic p lotters a nd o f cou rse, th e U ltra Vu 3 36 0
D ig ital P rintin g S y stem . T h ey co m p u te the b rig h tn ess and c o lo r v alue
of each p ixel o n the p age so that th e resultin g p attern of p ixe ls re-creates
th e v ecto r g rap hics an d te xt orig in ally describ ed.
ROM - A cro ny m for read-on ly m em o ry. A n y sem ico nd uctor circu it
serv in g as a m em o ry that co ntain s instructio ns or d ata th at can be rea d
bu t no t m odified (w he the r placed there b y m anu fa cturin g or by a
p ro g ram m in g p ro c ess, as in P R O M and E P R O M ).
RS232 - A n acce pte d ind ustry stand ard for serial co m m u nica tio ns
con nectio ns. A do pted by the E lec trical Ind ustrie s A sso ciatio n, this
R eco m m en ded S tand ard (R S ) d efine s the specific lin es a nd sig nal
characteristic s used b y seria l co m m u nica tio ns co ntro llers to stan dardize
th e tran sm issio n of serial d ata b etw een dev ice s. T he letter C deno tes th at
th e c urren t versio n of the sta nda rd is the th ird in a series.

G lossary G-5
 RS422 - S tand ard s for serial com m un icatio ns w ith tran sm ission
distanc es o ver 50 feet. R S -4 49 inco rp orates R S -422 and R S -42 3.
M acintosh serial p orts are R S -42 2 po rts.
RTL - A crony m for raster tran slation lang uag e. RT L , a sub set of H P -
G L /2, is a raste r fo rm at d eve lop ed b y H ew lett P ackard for d riving co lo r
prin ters. A ll fo rm ats read b y C olo rB urst, T IF F, C T, and the raste r im ag e
created b y th e P o stS cript R IP, fo r ex am ple, are first co nv erted to RT L
before being sen t to the prin ter. RT L d ata is create d after all other
proce sses such as R G B to C M Y K , color co rrection , an d ha lfton in g
(d ith erin g o r e rror d iffu sio n ) h av e b een co m pleted .
Sateliting of artifacts - sm all d epo sits of ink scattered abou t th e ink
drop let. T his effect o ccurs in th e ho rizon tal d irection o f th e p rint an d
usu ally m a nifests itself to th e user as a “h a lo ”.
SCSI - A cro ny m for S m all C o m p uter S ystem In terface , a stan dard
h ig h -spe ed p arallel in terfa ce d efin e d b y the X 3 T 9.2 co m m itte e o f th e
A m erican N ation al S tan dards Institu te (A N S I). A S C S I interface is u sed
to co nn ect m icroc om pu ters to S C S I perip heral d evices, suc h as m an y
hard disk s an d p rinte rs, an d to o th er com p uters an d loca l area n etw orks.
Secondary ink tank - S m all in k ta nk o n carria ge.
Skewing - S u bstrate trac kin g un even ly o n platen and take-up .
Sludge - M ud -like su bstan ce fo rm in g in ink cans from in k particles.
Software - C om p u te r p ro g ram s; in struction s that m ak e h ard w are w o rk .
Spatter - ‘D o ts’ o n prin ted im a ge th at app ear to be form ed of den se r
in k.
SW O P - S W O P stand s for "S tand ards for W eb O ffset P rinting " a set o f
specification s create d by the S W O P ad viso ry com m ittee. T he
com m ittee in clu des representativ es from th e p rinting , p ub lish ing and
adv ertising in dustries. T he purpo se o f these specification s is to estab lish
a m eth od o f reprod ucing process co lor adv ertisem en ts w ith predic tab le
and co nsistent results. B efore S W O P, ad vertising ag encies w ere un able
to se nd film fro m variou s color se parato rs to different p ub lic atio ns an d
see the sam e p rin ted results fro m m on th to m o n th o r m a g azin e to
m agazine. S W O P proo fs are p rep re ss proo fs th at con fo rm to the S W O P
stan d ard. W aterP ro o f, C ro m alin , M atc h p rin t, P ressM a tch a n d S ig natu re
are just a few of the co m m o n S W O P p roofs availab le. A n d be cause th e
S W O P stan dards are based o n re al-w o rld prin tin g re quire m en ts, m o st
prin ters are able to m atc h a S W O P proo f. Variou s p ub licatio ns pu blish
th eir S W O P specifications to add ress th e p articu lar variab les of press,
in k and p ape r. T h ese specificatio ns are pub lish ed in a catalog that is
availab le to any on e p ro duc ing ad vertisem e nts or co lor sep aratio n film .

G-6 G lossary
T he kind o f inform atio n listed in clu des screen ruling s, m axim u m ink
den sity, p age sizes an d film orien tation . T his inform ation is n eeded
before any w ork can beg in on you r job.
Takeup tension control - P otentiom eter w hich con trols am ou nt o f
to rq u e o n tak e u p roller.
Teflon - A p lastic w ith ex cellent self-lu bricating (slipp ery ) b earing
prop erties.
TIFF - A cron ym fo r Tagg ed Im age F ile F o rm at o r Tag Im age F ile
F orm at. A stan dard file form a t com m on ly u se d fo r scan nin g, storag e,
and interc hang e of gray-scale grap hic im a ges. T IF F m ay b e the o nly
fo rm at a v ailab le fo r o ld er p ro g ram s (su ch as o ld er v ersio n s o f
M acP aint), b ut m o st m o dern p ro gram s are able to save im a ges in a
variety of other form ats, su ch as G IF o r JP E G .
Tension sw itch - C o ntro ls to rq ue m oto r d irection: fo rw ard (w ind ); o ff
or rev erse (un w in d).
Thom son (Trade Nam e) rails - P recision rails o n w h ich the carriage
travels.
Torque m otor - T he m otor that turns th e tak e-u p ro ller.
Um bilical assem bly - Tu bes an d cables enclosed b y N y latrac.
Waves - ex cessiv e ink or su bstrate resultin g in v ery un even d ry in g,
sim ilar to w av es in w ater.

G lossary G-7
G-8 G lossary
 Index
••••••

B
Symbols B Pinch Button 1-9
Back Feed Roller 2-14
Back Pinch Rollers 1-9
(C) Properties (Sharing) Window 6-6
Backplane Board 2-2
Bail System 2-19
Bi-Directional Adjustment Quality 4-17
Numerics Bi-Directional Alignment Parameter 3-14
Bi-Directional Alignment Test 1-12
20 ips Alignment ... 60 ips Alignment 9-4 BIOS Beep Codes and Messages 9-25
3Com NIC Diagnostics (Diagnostics) Window 6-5 BIOS Error Beep Codes 9-26
3-Phase DELTA 8-3 BIOS Error Beep Messages 9-28
3-Phase WYE (5-Wire) 8-3 BIOS Error Messages 9-29
Black Button 1-9
Black Button (Color 4) 1-9
Blower Specifications 9
BRU Master 9-49
A Bubble Level 8-7
Button Bar 4-4
About Button 4-4
About UltraVu 4-20
About UltraVu by VUTEk Window 4-20
AC power 8-3 C
Access Through Share Permissions Window 6-7
Actuator (air cylinder) 2-12 Calibrating ColorBurst Colors 5-14
Addressable resolution 1-1 Carriage Drive Servo Motor 2-13
AdjustIng D-Max and Color Balance 5-19 Cap Heads 1-12
Adjusting Neutral Balance 5-18 Capper 1-11, 2-10
Adjusting the Edge Detector 7-12 Capper Down 1-12
Adjusting the Linear Encoder Head Gap 7-14 Capper Override 9-7
Adjusting the Mid-tone Density Gradation 5-17 Capper Override Switch 2-11
Advance Button 1-8 Capper Plate 1-12, 2-12, 3-6
Advanced PostScript Options Window 5-10 Capper Plate Control Solenoid 2-10
AGP Video Board 9-35 Capper Plate Regulator 2-10
Air Core Shaft 11, 12, 13 Caring for the Jet Pack 7-4
Air Pressure Regulator 2-9 Carriage 3-25
Air Pressure Regulators 2-10 Carriage Assembly 2-3
Air Pressure Regulators and Solenoids 2-9 Carriage Backplane Board 2-2, 9-42
Air Requirements 8-5 Carriage Components 2-2
Air, Solvent and Waste Lines 2-6 Carriage Drive Motor 2-16
AMIBIOS 9-23 Carriage Fan 2-3
Approved cloths 7-5 Carriage Height Adjustment 3-25
Auto Purge Setting 1-11 Carriage Interface Board 2-2, 9-41
Auto Shutdown 4-9 Carriage Position 9-8
Auto Shutdown Button 4-5 Carriage Rail 2-17
Auto-Dry Button 4-4 Carriage Rails 7-8
Carriage Shuttle Test 9-9
Carriage Temp 9-8

Index I-1
Changing Ink Colors 5 and 6 7-6 Drive Window 9-50
Channels 2-2 Drop on Demand Inkjets 2-2
Check Filter Error 7-10 Duplications 4-11
Cleaning the Ink Level Sensors 7-11 Duplications Screen 4-11
Cleaning the Primary Ink Tank Filters 7-10
Cleaning the Secondary Ink Tanks 7-12
Cleaning the UltraVu 3360 7-2
CMYK 1-1, 5-7 E
CMYK files 5-1
Color 1-9 Edge Detector 2-2, 2-3, 7-12
Color 5 Button 1-9, 1-10 Edge Detector Adjustment 7-12
Color Adjustments Window 5-13 Edge Detector Offset 9-6
Color balance 5-5 Edge Detector Status 9-9
Color Mode 4-7 Edge Overlap Setting 4-9
ColorBurst RIP 1-3 Electrical Cabinet 2-21, 9-18
ColorBurst RIP Software 5-1 Emergency Stop (E-Stop) Button 3-2
ColorBurst RIP Station 1-3 Emergency Stop Button 2-16
ColorBurst RIP Workstation 8-6 EMI 2-20
ColorBurst Workflow 5-21 EMI Filter 2-15
Com NIC Diagnostics (General) Window 6-5 Empty Pack Setting 1-11
Configuring / Booting from a SCSI CD-ROM 6-15 Encoder Wheel 3-26
Configuring / Booting from an IDE CD-ROM 6-15 Encoder Wheel Assembly (right side) 3-27
Configuring the RIP Workstation 6-4 Enhanced Mode 3-19
Configuring the Workstation 6-14 Enter Password 4-19
control panel 1-7 Entering the Printer Firmware 9-2
Control Panel Board 9-47 ENV folder 5-10
Controls and Indicators 1-7 Environment 8-3
Cooling Fans 2-2, 2-3 Error Button 1-10
CPU Module 9-31, 9-36 Error Messages 9-14
Creating a Printer Setup File 5-11 Error Status Window 9-4
Creating UltraVu Firmware / Software Disks A-2
Critical Error Messages 9-13
Cutter Button 4-5 F
Cutter Mechanism 2-19
Cyan Button 1-9 F Pinch Button 1-8
Fan Switch Locatio 3-18
Features 1-3
D features 1-3
Feeding Media 11
Dancer Bar 11, 12 File Formats 10-2
Default Path 4-17 File Info 4-7
Defaults Path Window 4-17 File Information Screen 4-8
Diagnostic Aids Window 9-8 File Menu 4-6
Dimensions 8-1 File Open Window 9-51
Disabling Color Balance 5-13 Fire Jets Setting 1-12
Disabling ICC Profile Color Management 5-12 Fire Pulse Width 9-6
Disk Space Free Parameter 4-19 Firmware Revision 4-20
Dot 5-4 Float switches 2-5
Dot Gain 5-4 Formatting Removable Disk Cartridges C-1
Dot Gain on Different Media 5-5 Formatting Removable JAZ Cartridges C-1
Double Strike Option 4-8 Front Pinch Roller 2-14
Draft Mode 3-19 Front Pinch Rollers 1-8, 2-19
Drive Select Window 9-52 Front Tension Moto 2-15
Drive Tuning 9-10 Front Y Servo Controller 9-55
Drive Tuning Window 9-10 Fuses c1 ... c8 9-8

I-2 Index
 Ink/Carrier Balance 5-4
Inks 10-2
In-Line Filters 2-6
G In-line Ink Filter 7-10
Installing the Jet Packs 7-6
GCR, UCR, Maximum Black / Neutral Balance 5-6 Installing the NIC Card 6-8
Gear Ratio... F ... R 9-5 Installing UltraVu Firmware A-5
Get Media Stats 4-20 Installing UltraVu Firmware to Flash Drive A-6
Get Printer Rev 4-20 Installing UltraVu Software A-7
Graphical user interface 1-2 Interface Card Memory Test 9-9
Gray Component Replacement 5-6 IR Dryer 2-18

H J
Hazards with Jet Packs 3-9 Jet Covering Procedure 3-7, 7-4
Head Cleaning Fluid 7-5 Jet Driver Board 2-9
heads 1-12 Jet Outage 3-23
Heater Control LCD 1-13 Jet Pack 2-2
Heater Controls 1-13 Jet Pack Assembly 2-2
Help Button 4-4 Jet Pack Boards 2-2, 2-3
Help Menu 4-19 Jet Pack Cleaning Station 3-9, 3-11
Help Topics 4-19 Jet Pack Description 2-2
Horizontal space between each image 4-11 Jet Packs 1-11
HV Amplifier Board 2-2 Jet Preparation Procedure 3-6
Job Data Window 4-17

I
K
ICC Color 1-2
ICC Profile 5-1 Key and Code 4-18
ICC Profile Options Window 5-12
Image Control 3-17
Image Dimensions 4-7
Image Resolution 4-7 L
Image Size 4-7
Improving Print Quality 3-20 Layout Area 5-8
Infrared (IR) 2-18 LCD 1-13
Ink and Solvent Carriage Components 2-5 Left Edge... Right Edge ... Width 9-4
Ink and Solvent Control 2-4 Left margin 4-9
Ink and Solvent Control Diagram 2-7 Level sensors 2-9
Ink and Solvent System 2-4 Leveling the Printer 8-6
Ink and Solvent Systems 2-4 Light CM 1-1
Ink Balance and RGB to CMYK Window 5-19 Light CMYK 1-1
Ink Characteristics That Affect Dot Gain 5-4 Limit Switch Offset 9-6
Ink Draw Transfer Board 9-46 Linear Encoder Reader Head 7-14
Ink Film Thickness 5-5 Linear Encoder Strip 7-9
Ink Level Sensor 2-5 Lint-free cleaning cloth 7-3
ink level sensor 7-11 Loading 10-1
Ink Pumps 2-9 Loading Material 3-3
Ink Purge Setting 1-11 Lower Resolution RIP Files 3-24
Ink Supply Plate 2-4, 2-9 Lubricating the Carriage Rails 7-8
Ink Tray 2-8

Index I-3
M Offset Simulation Calibration 5-19
Oil Filtration System 8-5
Magenta Button 1-9 Online Button 1-8
Magenta Button (Color 2) 1-9 Open Button 4-4
Magnetic Pickup Sensor 2-17 Operating the Heater Controls 3-14
Main Circuit Breaker 2-20 Operating the Media Cooling Fans 3-17
Main Disconnect Switch 2-20 Operator Requirements 1-14
Main Drive Pulley 2-13 Optical Encoder 2-17
Main Operator 1-16 Other Operator 1-16
Maintaining the Cleaning Station 3-12 Output 10-1
Maintaining the Printer 7-1 Output Options 5-9
Maintenance Chart 7-15 Output Resolution 4-12
Maintenance Procedures 7-2 Output Resolutions Screen 4-12
Maintenance Schedule 7-1 Over/Under toggle switch 12, 16
Manual Conventions xxix Overflow Container 2-11
Material Safety Data Sheets D-1 Override button E-2
Material Usage Window 4-21
Max Media Mode Overrid 9-7
Max Speed 3-19
Maximum Black 5-7
P
Maximum Saturation Calibration 5-20
Paper Out Override 9-7
Media Advance Button 4-4
Passes to Print File 4-7
Media Characteristics That Affect Dot Gain 5-5
Password Entry Window 4-18
Media Layout Screen 4-9
PCI Interface Board 9-38
Media Speed 5-5
Peer-to-Peer 6-2
Media Step Size 4-16
Peer-to-Peer Configuration 6-2
Media type 10-1
Piezo 2-2
Media width 4-9
Piezo principle, 2-2
Memory Size 4-20
Piezoelectric 1-1
Memory Transfer Speed 9-9
Pigment Strength 5-4
Motor Encoder 2-16
Pinch Override 9-7
Motors, Servos and Encoders 2-13
Pinch Roller Regulator 2-9, 2-19
Multiple Print Modes 3-20
Pinch Roller Regulators 2-9
Multiple Rolls 3-5
Pinch Roller System (Air Section) 2-19
My Computer Window 6-6
Pixel Board 9-45
Pixel Card Memory Test 9-9
Plastic feeler gauge 7-15
N Platen Preheater 2-17, 2-18
Platen Preheater / Media Dryer Controls 1-13
Network (Adapters) Window 6-10 Platen Preheater Settings 3-21
Network (Protocols) Window 6-9 PostScript file 5-2
Network (Services) Window 6-11 Postscript file mode 5-1
Network Configurations 6-1 PostScript Interpreter Options Window 5-10
Network Interface Card 9-40 PostScript Layout Output File Option Window 5-9
Neutral Balance 5-7 PostScript level 3 1-2
NIC 6-2 PostScript Options 5-9
NIP Rollers E-8 Power Access Panel 2-20
Nozzle 2-2 Power Board 9-39
Number of duplicate images printed 4-11 Power Button 1-10
Power Conditioning System (PCS) 8-3
Power Requirements 8-3
Power switch 12, 16
O Preparing the Jet Packs for Printing 3-6
Prepress Requirements 8-5
Offline 1-8 Primary CMYK Inks 5-15

I-4 Index
Primary Ink Tank 2-9 Recovering from Flash Drive Failure A-1
Primary Ink Tank Filter 7-10, 7-11 Recovering from Plugged Jets 3-8
Primary Ink Tanks 2-8, 2-9 Regulators 2-19
Print 4-13 Removing the Jet Packs 7-5
Print Density 5-5 Repairing the NT Operating System 6-16
Print Gap 3-20 Replacing the Carriage Air and Solvent Filter 7-9
Print Head Heater 2-3 Reset Button 1-10
Print Head Speed 5-5 Restoring the UltraVu 3360 Environment 5-11
Print Button 4-4 Restrictor Valve 2-12
Printer Control Unit 9-31 Returning Jet Packs 3-12
Print Menu 4-6 Rewriting Servo Parameters 9-48
Print Mode Screen 4-9 RGB 5-1, 5-7
Print Modes Screen 4-8 Right margin 4-9
Print Options 4-8 RIP 5-3
Print Parameters Selected Screen 4-13 Rolls size 10-1
Print Selected Area 4-5 RTL 4-1
Print width 10-1 RTL files 4-12
Printer 5-9
Printer Characteristics and Settings That Affect
Dot Gain 5-5
Printer Component Location 1-4 S
Printer Control Software 1-15
Printer Control Unit 1-15, 2-15 Saving the Printer Setup Settings 5-14
Printer Controller 2-3 Schedule Details 7-1
Printer Controller BIOS 9-22 SCSI Adapter Board 9-43
Printer Controller Board 9-33 Secondary Ink Reservoirs 2-6
Printer Firmware 9-7 Secondary Ink Tank 2-9, 7-12
Printer Firmware Revision Level Window 4-20 Secondary Ink Tanks 2-5, 2-11
Printer Function Buttons 1-8 Secondary Tanks 1-11
Printer Function Selector Switch 1-11, 2-6 Select Area 4-12
Printer Option with Printer Setup Window 5-8 Select Printing Areas Screen 4-13
Printer Selector Switch Logic 2-6 Selecting Network Services Window 6-14
Printer Settings 4-16 Server-Router 6-3
Printer Setup 9-5 Server-Router Configuration 6-3
Printer Setup Window 9-6 Services Window 6-12
Printer Status Window 9-3 Servo Controller 2-15
Servo Enable jumpers 9-53
Set Printer Parameters Window 4-16
Setting D-Max 5-15
Q Setting Maximum Ink Densities 5-12
Setting the Carriage Height 3-24
Quality Speed 3-18 Setup Menu 4-15
Shutting Off the Printer 3-2
Site Preparation 8-1
Site Preparation Guide 8-1
R Software Build 4-20
Solenoid Plate 2-2, 2-4
Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) 8-3 Solenoids 2-6
Raster Image Processing (RIP) 1-2 Solvent Purge Setting 1-11
Raster Image Processor 5-3 Solvent Regulator 2-9
Read Default Settings 4-16 Solvent Tank 2-9
Ready Setting 1-12 Solvent Tank Regulator 2-9
Rear Y Servo Controller 9-54 Sony Linear Encoder Box 7-15
Rear Y Servo Controller (Feed) 2-16 Space Requirements 8-1
Rear Y Servo Drive Motor 2-14 Space Requirements and Dimensions 8-1
Recovering from an Emergency Stop 3-2 Speed 10-1

Index I-5
Spitune Count 9-6 UltraVu Printer Workstation 1-3
Stand Alone 6-1 UltraVu Setup Screen 1-13
Stand Alone Configuration 6-1 UltraVu Workstation 8-5, 9-21
Stand Alone Workstation 6-1 Under Color Removal 5-6
Standard Speed 3-18 Understanding Dot Gain 5-4
Starting the Printer 3-2 Understanding Print Modes 3-19
Starting the UltraVu Control Program 4-2 Understanding Print Speeds 3-18
Step Adjustment Test 1-12 Understanding the Postscript File Format 5-2
Step Distance 9-5 Understanding the UltraVu Control Program 4-1
Step Setting 3-20 Units Screen 4-10
Step Size Parameter 1-13, 3-14 Unwind/Wind Switch E-6
Media Dryer 2-17, 2-18 Unwind/Wind/Auto Switch E-2
Media Dryer Settings 3-22 Unwinder Accessory E-1
Media Feed Path 3-5 Unwinder Control Panel E-2
Media Feed Roller Drive Motor 2-16 Use Moused Area Setting 4-12
Media Tension Settings 3-23 Use Selected Area Button 4-5
Super P6SBU Motherboard 9-31, 9-37 Using the Internal Test Patterns 3-12
SWOP 5-1
System Tests 9-8
System Tests Window 9-9
V
Vacuum Control Override 9-7
T Vacuum Output 9-6
Vacuum Reading 9-5
Tack and Viscosity 5-4 Vacuum Target 9-5
Tension 5-5 Vacuum Time-out 9-6
Tension Button 1-9 Ventilation Hood Design 9
Test 1 1-12, 3-13 Ventilation system 9
Test 2 1-12, 3-13 Venturi 2-2, 2-5, 2-11
Test 3 1-12, 3-13 Verifying BIOS Settings for Flash Drive A-5
Test 4 1-12, 3-14 View Menu 4-14
Test 5 1-12, 3-14 VUTEk Head Cleaning Fluid 3-10
Test 6 1-13, 3-14 VxWorks 9-19
Test Button 1-8
Trial Runs 3-24
Troubleshooting Checklist 9-1
True resolution 1-1 W
Wake-up Button 4-5
Warning Messages 9-11
U Weep Count 9-5
Weep Interval 9-5
Ultra ... Enhanced ... Draft 9-4 Wide-format 1-2
Ultra Mode 3-19 Winder Accessory E-5
UltraVu 3360 RIP 10-1 Winder Control Panel E-6
UltraVu 3360 Accessories E-1 Windows NT 4-1
UltraVu 3360 Maintenance Schedule 7-16 Working with ColorBurst 5-7
UltraVu Control Program 3-1, 4-1 Working with Ink, Media, and Printer Setup 3-2
UltraVu Control software 1-14 Working with the Air Core Shaft E-3
UltraVu Control Unit 1-14, 9-36 Workstation Interface 1-14
UltraVu Head Cleaning Fluid 7-4 Workstation JAZ drives. 8-6
UltraVu Ink Solvent 2-9 Writing Drive Parameters 9-52
UltraVu Menu Structure 4-2

I-6 Index
X Y
X Servo Controller 2-13, 2-15 Y Servo Controller 2-14, 2-15
X Servo Linear Encoder 2-17 Y Servo Motor 2-14
X Servo Motor 2-13 Y Servo Rotary Encoder 2-16
Yellow Button 1-9
Yellow Button (Color 3) 1-9

Index I-7
I-8 Index